The Explosive

VEER OFFENSE
for Winning Football

Jim Wacl~er
and
Don Morton

Porl~er Publishing Company, Inc.

West Nyacl~, New YoriL IBRAAY
 ©1980, by
Dedication
PARKER PUBLISHING COMPANY, INC.
West Nyack. New York

All rights reselVed. No pari of this
book may be reproduced in any form or
by any means, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
To our w ives, Li l and Sue, whose love and support
malle it all worthwhile.
To all the coaches we have worlled with-Rolph
Storenllo, Jiggs Westergard, ond Tom Mueller in
porticular-for their core and concern for young
men.
To our players, for their commitment and
dedication to excellence, both on ond off the
field.

Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data

Wacker. Jim
The explosive veer offense for winning football .

Includes index.
1. Football-Offense. 2. Football coaching. I.
Morton. Don. joint author. II. Title.
GV951.8.W3 796.332'2 80·11738
ISBN 0·13·298018-5

Printed in the United States of America


How You Can Profit from the
Veer Offense
A balanced running and passing attack that can score from
any place on the field-that's the veer or triple option offense.
Many of the teams that are properly executing this offense are ·
breaking offensive records at an unprecedented rate. They are
piling up points like never before.
What is it about the veer offense that makes it so explosive?
Why have long runs and passes again become such common
occurrences? Basically, it is because a relatively new offense is
ahead of the present defenses-a phenomenon that has occurred
many times before in the history of this great game. In nearly every
football clinic across the nation, defensive coaches spend the
majority of their time trying to explain how they plan to defend the
triple option. Several years ago it was the wishbone offense. Today
it is the inside and outside veer executed from a variety of
formations.
This book examines fully and comprehensively the veer attack
against every conceivable defense. In analyzing the offense, all of
the important coaching pOints and strategies are identified in a
very concrete and simple fashion. After reading and studying this
book you will be able to teach and employ the veer offense at any
level of competition.
6
HOW YOU CAN PROFIT mOM THE VEER OFFENSE 7
Several factors must coincide in any winning football pro-
gram. First, it is obvious that talented athletes make coaching a
lot easier. You must have the horses! But proper teaching tech·
niques and drills can be a great equalizer, and a big part of our job
is to develop the talent of those with whom we have the privilege to
work. Secondly, you must also be a motivator of men; you must be
able to get the "great effort" out of your players. But a third factor
is often the one that makes the difference between winning and
losing-between a .500 season and an undefeated season. It
revolves around your knowledge of the game. Is the system sound?
Is the system current and ahead of the defenses? Can you out-
coach your opponent because you have a better offense and a
better defense? And most important, can your players execute your
system properly during the game? It is what they can do, not what
the coach knows, that wins the football game.
Finally, the threat of the pass must be present in order for you
to have a completely sound offense. More than any other offense,
the veer lends itself exceptionally well to the play action passing
game. With a dive back on playside, you have an extra blocker,
enabling you to choose from a variety of blocking schemes to fit
your personnel. In the following pages you will be exposed to the
advantages and disadvantages of several blocking schemes. Some
basic rules regarding seven-man and eight-man fronts will also be
presented.
Every offense must be able to convert on those critical third
and long situations. A play action pass is seldom effective under
these conditions. In Chapter 10, you will read about a simple
dropback series and a short sprint-out attack./~
Rather than just a discussion of pass patterns, you will be
exposed to a thorough system of quarterback reads. You will be
able to train your QB to read secondary coverages prior to the
snap of the ball by reading a couple of keys. For those defenses
who disguise their coverages, you will find a simple system
enabling your QB to read the secondary as the play develops.
When you teach your QB secondary reads, he will be able to
anticipate open receivers. You will be able to turn your QB into a
high percentage passer. Not only QB reads, but also QB technique
is presented with each pass series.
A thorough discussion of many pass patterns is presented,
enabling you to choose those which fit your personnel. A complete
8 HOW YOU CAN PROFIT FROM THE VEER OFFENSE

passing game allows you to throw to any of your five receivers. You
will find several patterns for each eligible receiver.
Teams are winning with the veer offense because it is sound. It
is an offensive package that can put a tremendous amount of
pressure on the defense with both the running and the passing
games. In defending the veer, the opponents become spread out
across the entire field and good defensive pursuit and gang Contents
tackling are impossible. Because of the powerful running threat,
the passing game opens up and long passes are probable even
against good zone secondaries.
How You Can Profit from the Veer Offense. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
The other key to the success of the veer offense is that it is
relatively simple to learn and to execute. It entails very few plays 1. Exploding with the Veer Offense ....... / '/';: . . . . . . . 15
and the blocking patterns readily adjust to any defense. The
running and passing games are also fully coordinated, and they The outside veer (17) ... Continuity in the running and
complement each other. Above all else, play execution wins passing attack (18) ... Simplicity and execution (19) ...
football games, and this book covers every minute detail in the Two tight ends and a flanker (21) ... 1f it works, use it (22)
execution of the veer offense.
2. Coordinating the Running-Passing Attack
Jim Wacker with a Simple Numbering System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Don Morton
Dive, veer and option (25) ... Line splits (25) ... Aligning
personnel (26) ... Calling the play and using automatics
(27) ... Calling the "automatic on one" (29) ... Changing
the snap count (29) ... Analyzing defensive strength and
weakness (30) ... Establishing sound blocking patterns
against any defense (35) ... Using the 8 call as the base-
rule block (35) ... The double team block with a 4 call
(37) ... Fold blocks for dives and counters (40) ... Pulling
the playside guard (43) ... Tackle calls for the passing
game (43)

3. Stretching the Defensive Perimeter

with the Outside Veer.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 48

A great short yardage play (49) ... Quarterback execution

on the read (50) ... Teaching the mesh by the dive back
(52) ... Key coaching points for the outside veer
(53) ... The pitch relationship is critical (54) ... Executing
the pitch (55) ... Blocking patterns for the outside veer
(55) ... Attacking the stack-gap defense (57) ... Blocking
the pro 43 defense (58) ... Blocking patterns against split
9
:. .•,.01',._". ,_ ~. , .. _ _ _, ...'
10 CONTENTS
defenses (61) ... Use an 88 call against a split 6 defense
(62) ••. The near shoulder block (63) ... Adjusting to a 53
or 71 defense (63) .. . Attacking the 65 goal line defense
(64) ... Blocking adjustments with the 44 call and a doo-
dad block (66) . . . Why the outside veer is our bread and
butter (67)
4. Teaching the Execution of the Inside Veer . . . . . . . . . 68
New defensive innovations to stop the veer (69) ..•
Offensive adjustments to changing defenses (69) ... Use a
check veer release against a fire end (71) ... Reading the
veer with scoop blocking (71) ... Get to the pitch against a
slant tackle (72) . .. The doo-dad block and the inside veer
(73) . .. The 44 call or 11 call to seal the linebacker (74) ..•
Blocking the veer against pro 43 defense (75) ... The
inside veer will beat the split defense (77) ... Plays which
complement the veer (78) ... Making two plays into one-
the dive and cut-back (78) ... Blocking the tackle on a
44-45 option (79) ... Three key factors in executing a
successful veer offense (80) ... The execution of the veer
release block (81) ... Blocking the secondary with the
stalk block (82) . .. The quarterback read for the inside
veer (83) ... Beating the fire stunt by a defensive end
(84) ... Attacking the slow-play end (84) .. . Optioning
against a boxing defensive end (85) ... The veer continues
to evolve (86)
5. Breaking Long Runs with the Counter
and Counter Option. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. 87
The double dive counter (88) ... A consistent inside attack
with the 22-23 dive (89) ... Blocking the dive against an
even defense (90) ... The problem encountered with the
split defense (91) . .. Use a 1 and 2 call against a gap-stack
defense (93) ... Executing the 22-23 counter option
(93) ... A good pitch relationship is essential (94) ... The
key is slowing down pursuit (94) ... Never give a lineman
an impossible block (96) ... Pulling the guard to block
secondary force (96) ... Variations in blocking split de-
fenses (98) ... A quick-hitting counter option without
CONTENTS 11
counter steps (100) ... Tie in the run and the pass for con-
tinuity (101) ... Review ofthe main coaching points (101)
6. Coordinating the Lead Option
Within the Veer Offense. . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. 102
The quarterback action on the lead option (102) ... Block-
ing force with an arc block (103) ... Establishing the
proper pitch relationship (103) ... Great pursuit can hurt
the lead option (104) ••. Blocking the offside linebacker
(104) ... Perfecting the scoop and slip blocks (105) ...
Advantages of scoop blocking (105) ... The scoop block
against even defenses (l06) •• . Does the scoop block give
linebackers a quick read? (107) .. . Blocking the entire sec-
ondary (107) ... Devising ways to block the free safety
(108) ••. The offside tight end must get the offside corner
(109) ... Why not combo block the defensive tackle?
(109) . . . Use a G call against gap-stack and short yardage
defenses (110) ... Blocking the 65 defenses with a 4 call
(111) ... Running the lead option toward a split end
(112) ... Blocking the lead option against option switch
(112) ... A review ofthe key coaching pOints (113)
7. Teaching the Crazy Option
with Trap Blocking. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .. 115
The quarterback reads the pulling guard (116) . .. Execut-
ing the doo-dad block (116) ... The tight end uses a check
veer release (118) .•. Block the Okie with a 4 call (118) ...
Blocking the wide pro 43 defense (118) ... Trap blocking
the split defenses (120) ... X call by the flanker
(120) ... Blocking the 65 goal line (121) ... The 28-29 trap
slows down pursuit (121) ... Reasons for including the
crazy option (122)
8. Complementing the Veer Offense
with Three Additional Power Plays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 123
Blocking technique for the lead back (124) .. . Executing
the handoff and the bootleg fake (124) ... The running
back squares into the hole (125) ... Blocking the various
12
defenses (125) ... Pulling the offside guard and tackle
(126) ... The 46-47 power sets up the outside veer (127) ...
Bootlegs help slow down the pursuit (127) . .. Countering
with the B46-B47 (128) ... An isolation play to keep the
linebacker honest (130) ... Why include the 50 series?
(130)
9. Attacking the Secondary with Veer
and Counter Action Passes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 132
Establishing a play action passing attack (132) .. . Advan-
tages of play action passes from the veer offense (133) ...
Nomenclature and pass routes (133) ... Simulating the
running game up front (135) ... Playside tackle calls
(137) ... Backside tackle calls (138) ... Blocking play ac-
tion passes hitting the 6 and 7 holes (138) ... Blocking
stunts seven-man fronts (138) ... Blocking an eight-man
front (143) .. . Line technique (144) ... Troublesome stunts
for the offense (145) ... Blocking variations (147) ... The
tight end dump pass (148) ... Quarterback execution on
the dump pass (149) ... Defending the dump (151) ... De-
fenses vulnerable to the dump pass (152) . .. The tight end
flag (154) ... Reading the secondary on the flag route
(155) ... Quarterback execution on the flag route (156) ...
The flag as a good pattern into the short side of the field
(158) ... The flanker's fly route (159) ... Flanker execution
on the fly route (160) ... Quarterback execution on the fly
route (160) . . . Throwback pass off play action (162) .. .
Throwback post (163) ... Throwback circle (164) .. .
Throwback fly (165) ... Other game-winning patterns off
play action (166) ., . Tight end delay (166) ... Quick postto
the flanker (167)
10. Adding a Dropback Passing Attack ................ 170
Nomenclature (170) ... Quarterback set-up (171) ... Hot
receiver principle (171) ... Simple line blocking (172) . . .
Line technique in a dropback passing attack (173) .. .
Reading the secondary for man or zone coverage (176) .. .
Dropback flood series (178) ... Flood patterns to strength
CONTENTS CONTENTS 1J
(179) ... The flanker's curl pattern (179) ... QB execution
and secondary reads (181) ... The flanker's fly pattern
(184) ... QB execution and reads (185) ... The tight end's
deep sideline (186) ... QB execution and secondary reads
(188) ... The offside end's deep across pattern (189) ... QB
execution and secondary reads (190) . .. Delay patterns off
flood passes (191) ... Throwback off the strongside flood
series (192) . . . QB execution and secondary reads (194) . ..
Flood patterns to the weakside (195) ... The tight end flag
pattern (196) ... QB execution and secondary reads
(197) . . . The weakside back's flag pattern (198) .. . QB ex-
ecution and secondary reads (198) ... The curl pattern
(199) . .. QB execution and secondary reads (200) ...
Screens off flood action (200) .. . Attacking an eight-man
front with flood series passes (201) ... Running a flood
series with no hot receiver (203) ... Running a draw off
dropback action (203) ... Pressure the backside with a
divide series (205) ... The quick out (205) ... QB execution
and secondary reads (206) ... Throwback flood to the
weakside (207) .. . QB execution and secondary reads
(208)
11. Coaching Bootleg Action . .. . .......... ......... . .. 210
An excellent zone pattern (210) ... Line play for bootleg
passes (211) ... Quarterback execution on bootleg passes
(212) .. . Running back must fill for pulling lineman
(213) . . . The bootleg off the power action (213) ... Two
other effective bootleg patterns (215) .. . Why include
bootleg passes with the veer? (216)
12. Pressure the Defense
with Multiple Formations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 217
Formations with two wide receivers (217) ... Employing
the twins formation (218) ... Incorporating an unbalanced
attack with a minimum of new learning (219) ... Spread-
ing the defense with backfield motion (221) ... Motioning
to a trips formation (222) ... Why multiple formations?
(223)
14 CONTENTS

13. Preparing the Veer Quarterback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 224

Keying the free safety in a seven·man front (224) ... The

free safety key in an eight-man front (225) ... Attack an
eight-man front with the free safety cheated over to
strength (226) . .. Play selection when they shift a lineman
over in a seven-man front (227) . . . Down and distance
considerations (228) .. . Make up a play list for down and
distance situations for each game (229) . . . Develop a
sideline notebook (229) ... Using the hashmark to your
advantage (230) .. . Field position zones and analysis
(231) . .. Get the first down zone (232) .. . The wide open
zone (233) .. . The four down zone (233) .. . The must score
zone (234) .. . Play selection according to score and time Exploding with the
remaining (234) ... When to take a safety (235) .. . Attack-
ing a reading defense (235) ... Play selection against pen- Veer Offense
etrating defenses (236) .. . Will the weather affect the
game plan? (236) . .. No one ever said it would be easy
(237)

14. Teaching the Veer Offense

with Effective Drills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 238
Backfield drills (238) .. . Offensive line drills (239) . . .
Receiver drills (244)
Index .. . .. . .. .. .. ... ... ... ... . . .... . . .... ... . . ....... . 247
Each year you must again decide on the type of offensive
system you will use as the new season approaches. Many factors
will affect your decision. Your own knowledge of the game and
your familiarity with a particular system are important considera-
tions. Also important are the abilities and talents of your returning
players. But there is one other consideration that should always be
of primary concern with regard to chOOSing an offense: Is your
offensive system sound? Are the passing and running games fully
coordinated? Can the offense effectively attack the defensive
perimeter and spread out the pursuit so that long runs are more
likely to occur? Is it an uncomplicated system that the players can
readily learn to execute? All of these questions can be answered in
the affirmative when you use the veer offense. It is rapidly
becoming one of the most popular and exciting offenses in the
nation at the high school and college levels.
A brief analysis of the veer offense may help to clarify some of
the basic reasons for its present effectiveness. The first advantage
of a veer offense is that it outnumbers the defense at the point of
attack and hits with lightning quickness. The two basic plays are
the inside and the outside veer. The inside veer allows the offensive
 EXPLODING WITH THE VEm OFFENSE
16
tackle to double team down to the inside. The quarterback first
reads the defensive tackle and then the defensive end (Diagram
I-I).
c
c s
l
Diagram 1-1
Inside Veer
Because the offensive tackle is free to block down, he seals off
pursuit from the inside, and the offensive blockers outnumber the
defensive players at the point of attack. The quarterback then
meshes with the dive back, hitting quickly over the outside hip of
the offensive guard. If the defensive tackle closes down to tackle
the dive back, the quarterback simply pulls the ball, goes down the
line and options the defensive end. If the defensive tackle elects to
take the quarterback, then the quarterback will give the ball to the
dive back, who should break free into the secondary where only
the free safety will have a shot at him.
Most teams have found that they must stop the dive back and
they assign the tackle to close down. The quarterback then
options the defensive end. If he elects to take the pitch, the
quarterback will break into the secondary. If the defensive end
takes the quarterback, a long run should be possible on the pitch
since both the playside safety and the corner have been blocked by
the flanker and the tight end. Very few other plays in football are
designed so that the secondary is blocked by two players from the
playside of the attack, and this is a primary reason for the
explosiveness tlf the inside veer (and the counter option).
Another reason why so many long runs develop from the veer
is that the defense must assign specific players to stop the dive
back, the quarterback and the pitch. This forces the defense to
spread out along the line of scrimmage, for they must be com-
••• • , ____ I.. _~n~;f;~ ro<nnn.ihilitlJ. When the play is prop_
e_rl;..
EXPLODING WITH THE VEm OFFENSE 17
executed, one of the backs will break free into the secondary, and
the defensive pursuit is reduced to a minimum. Since pursuit and
gang tackling are prime prerequisites for sound defensive play, the
offense has now gained a tremendous strategic advantage. Long
runs are the inevitable result.
the outside veer
The rationale for the effectiveness of the outside veer is very
similar. In the outside veer, the dive back hits the tackle-end gap
and the tight end double teams down. sealing off the inside pursuit
(Diagram 1-2).
Diagram 1-2
Outside Veer
The execution of this play is even easier for the quarterback as
he now reads the defensive end, and the defense cannot force a
quick double read as it can on the inside veer. If the defensive end
closes down and takes the dive back, the quarterback can sprint
around the defensive end and option on the defensive safety. If the
defensive end elects to tackle the quarterback, the dive back
should break a long run because the safety must be responsible
fi~st for the pitch. If the safety keys the tight end and closes for the
dive back, the quarterback keep or the pitch should break for long
yardage. Defensive personnel at the hole are again outnumbered
by a 2 to 1 ratio. The long run is now a very real possibility because
~he defense must assign specific responsibilities for each offensive
Tack, an~ the defenSive pursuit is again reduced to a minimum.
Y..........._ _h~e_o_u_ts_lde veer has also been extremely effective in short yardage
 EXPLODING WITH THE VEEI'. OFFENSE EXPLODING WITH THE VEEI'. OFFENSE 19
18

-
situations. and the reason for this will be fully explained in Chap-
ter 3.
Another advantage of the veer offense is that it does not
require a massive offensive line that can consistently whip your
opponent's defensive personnel on a one-to-one basis. There are
several reasons for this. First. the plays hit the line of scrimmage
with amazing quickness and the linemen do not have to hold their
blocks for as long as they do in the traditional power offense. In the
second place. there is either a double team block or a good angle
block at the point of attack; therefore. the offensive linemen can
handle defensive players who are much bigger and physically Diagram 1-3
stronger than they are. Dump Pass

continuity in the running and passing attack

The veer offense also has certain advantages inherent in the t
c
passing attack. Since the basic running plays (veer and counter
option) have the tight end and flanker releasing immediately from
the line of scrimmage. this same release is extremely effective in
setting up play action passes which look identical to the running
offense. This puts an excessive amount of pressure on the defensive
secondary and forces them either to be late on their run support or
to take the chance of opening up a receiver for a big gain on a
dump pass or quick post. This type of play action pass also has the Diagram 1-4
advantage of a good play fake at the interior linebacker. which Fo I~e Dump Pass-Throwbacl~ Fly
helps to remove the defensive under-coverage (Diagram 1-3). The
fact that it is a very quick. short pass also increases the percentage explain the passing game and also analyze the advantages of
of completions and reduces the danger of the quarterback getting passing from this formation.
sacked.
The dump pass has been very effective. but there is another
factor that causes even more concern for the defense, and that is Simplicity and execution
the explosiveness of the long touchdown pass. One of our teams
was fortunate enough to throw 18 touchdown passes in 11 games, The veer offense has another inherent advantage that is
even though we only threw the ball about 20 percent of the time. emphasized by nearly every coach who has successfully employed
There were several reasons for this. First. the running game put the triple option attack-simplicity and execution. A minimum
tremendous pressure on the defensive secondary. They were forc~d number of plays and one alignment for the offensive backs form a
to play too close to the line of scrimmage. which resulted 10 critical part of the total offensive system. Any option attack
unsound pass coverage. Our best passing formation employed two demands precision and timing. and this means that the coach
tight ends with a flanker. The tight end away from the flanker was must Simplify the offense and cut the number of plays to a
consistently able to get in behind the defensive corner on ~~i~um. Because of this principle. we decided never to change
throwback action passes (Diagram 1-4). Chapters 9 and 10 fully alignment of our two running backs. We always have a split
 EXPLODING WITH THE VEEf\ OFFENSE EXPLODING WITH THE VEEf\ OFFENSE 21
20
line of scrimmage. In the wishbone or I formation, the quarterback
backfield alignment with both backs lined up directly behind the
also has to step back off the line of scrimmage to mesh with the
offensive guards 5 yards back from the line of scrimmage (Dia- dive back on the veer (Diagram 1-6). With split backs, the
gram 1-5). We will move our receivers around to create dIfferent
quarterback operates more along the line of scrimmage. The dive
formations, but precision and execut~on demand that our. backs' back can also hit the seam quicker, and it is easier to cut back
relationship to the quarterback remaInS the same. Eve~y tIme .we ag~inst the. grain because the angle approaching the line of
practice any play, the pitch relationship and the backfield actIon scnmmage IS less severe (Diagram 1-7).
will always be identical. Repetition eliminates mistakes and re-
duces fumbles, and that is a primary key to winning football
games.
c
0000 0tO 0
: 0 : 5 YAR DS o
oI 01+
Diagram 1-5
Split [locl~s
Diagram 1-7
Inside Veer-Wishbone
Many teams run the veer or triple option from the wishbone or
I formation and have had considerable success. We decided to use
the split backfield alignment for several reasons. First, it is the o~ly two tight ends and a flanker
formation that is ideally suited to the outside veer, and the outsIde
veer is football's most difficult play to defend. A second advantage We also selected the two tight ends and flanker formation,
is that our backs can get out faster on pass patterns than if they which we simply call "tight right" or "tight left," as our basic
were in an I formation. The limitations of the wishbone are even formation because of the simplicity of its execution for our line
more obvious in attempting to establish an effective passing (Diagram 1-8). The tight formation allows us to use exactly the
attack, since the offense will only have two receivers on or near the same blocking rules to either side; therefore, any play can be run
identically to either side. It is especially important that the outside
veer can now be executed effectively to either side. This would not
be feasible from either the pro or slot formation because there
S
c would not be a tight end on both sides.
c
TE SE

0000000
FL
o o
o 0
Diagram 1-8
Diagram 1-6
Tight Left Formation
Inside Veer-Split [locl~s
22 EXPLODING WITH THE VEER OFFENSE

The greatest advantage of this formation is that it makes your

game plan incredibly easy. We have one rule. If the defense adjusts
to flanker strength, you simply direct most of your plays away from
the flanker. Of course, if they do not make any major adjustments,
then you run primarily toward your flanker. How this is imple-
mented is fully explained in Chapter 2. An additional advantage of
the tight formation is that it reduces the number of stunts that you
are likely to see since you no longer have a split end side. Most
defensive teams prefer to gamble with stunts on the side away
from the tight end. It also helps on play action passes since you
can keep the tight end in for pass protection on the back side
whenever this is necessary. And finally, it is the hardest formation
for you to defend a nd that always helps to make you a believer. Coordinating the
if it works, use it Running-Passing Attack
In concluding this chapter, we would like to reemphasize one
important point: simplicity and execution win football games.
with a Simple
Teams actually beat themselves more often than their opponents
beat them. Fumbles, interceptions, missed blocking assignments
Numbering System
and busted plays generally spell defeat. Comparing two seasons in
which different offenses were used made our coaches realize the
importance of this particular concept. Before going exclusively to
split backs, we had a 6-4 record. We ran the power I, split and I
formations from pro, slot and tight alignments. The plays were the
In setting up any offense one f th fi
same veer offense. On paper it looked easy; but our execution terminology and numberl'n ' t 0 h erst considerations is the
suffered Significantly. The next year we ran only the split backs I gsys emt at yo I t ·
pays. There is no magical 5 st . U P an 0 use In calling
primarily from the tight formation. Our total offense in yardage principles should certainly: em:rescn~ed for this, but several
gained increased from 339 yards to 457 yards per game. We e
prime requirement Th t use as gUIdelines. Simplicity is a
averaged 38 pOints per game as opposed to 26 points the previous .
the hole or area in the I'e sys em must q . kl d
h mc y an easily identify
season. Our turnovers were also reduced significantly. The end a~ion and the type of bl~":k':'n e:~a~tt~ck is planned, the backfield
result was an 11-0 season and the NAIA Division II National Will also have to identify th g will be employed. A pass play
Championship. Simplifying our offensive formations certainly was plays must be identified c1ea~tass routes for all the receivers. The
not the only factor that contributed to such a drastic change In standing. A very vivid 'ct y to reduce any chance for misunder-
offensive proficiency, but all of our coaches are in total agreement mind so that he k PI ure must be painted in each player's
on one point: the most significant coaching change that was made . nows exactly what t d .
and In any game situat. T . 0 0 agamst every defense
was to use a split backfield alignment exclusively. terminology should be IO~'. f he thud consideration is that the
as ne and as concise as possible so that
23
 A SIMPLE NUMDEf\ING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUMDEf\ING SYSTEM 25
24
. kly in the huddle or at the line of dive, veer and option
the plays can be called qUlC tic or audible is necessary.
scrimmage in case an ;uto":~ g plays was established with these The word "dive" simply signifies a predetermined handoff to
Our entire syste~ or ~a 10 mber the holes in the line so the dive back in the designated hole. Thus, the 43 dive would be
three principles in mmd. Ftrst , wehnu the play or the play fake is the left halfback diving into the 3 hole. A 42 dive would be the
knows exactly w er e
that each PIa~er . 2-1). All of the even-numbered plays go right halfback diving into the 2 hole. If the word "veer" is used, the
designed to hit (Diagram b d lays go to the left. The last play will be a triple option with the quarterback having the option
to the right and the od~-n~mc::I:d rs always the hole where the of giving to the dive back, keeping or pitching. An example would
digit of any number wh.lch IS f e any play ending with a 4 will be a 47 veer, which would be the outside veer with the left halfback
initial back will hit the Ime ; t~e~e :e'guard-tackle gap to the right diving at the 7 hole. The defensive end is then read to your left
have a back hitting the 4 h 0 e 10 (Diagram 2-3).
side.
3 2 4 6 8
9070500000 c
o o
o 0
Diagram 2-1
Hole Numbers
Diagram 2-3
. . d termined by the series number of the 47 Veer
The backfield action I~ efi t umber called for any running
play, and this is always t e rs n I these two numbers plus one
. g plays use on y d
play. All 0 f our runnm. . . The 40 series is our dive, veer an Whenever the word "option" is used following the two play
or two wo~ds .for c~anficatl~:. side back always dives into the hole numbers, it means that the line base-rule blocks the defense. The
option senes 10 which th~ p :ack always runs an option course for quarterback will then simply fake to the dive back in the desig-
that is called and the offsld~d b 44 dive where the back on the nated hole and proceed to option the defensive end. The three
the pitch. An example wou d t~ a left back runs the option course plays are the 44 option, 44 veer and 44 dive. They will have
right dives into the 4 hole an. e identical backfield action. Other running plays that are numbered
to the right for the pitch (Diagram 2-2). in a series are the 20 series for counters and counter options, the
30 series for the lead option, the 50 series for powers and bootlegs,
and the 80 series for the draw plays. These will be explained
further in the following chapters.
o
line splits
Our line splits are somewhat different from those used by
Diagram 2-2
most veer teams. Normal line splits used in the veer offense require
44 Dive
26 A SIMPLE NUMOErlING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUMOErlING SYSTEM
27
3·foot splits between the linemen. We prefer to use 2\1'2·foot splits in
most situations, which helps in the execution of the vast majority QUICK SIDE STRONG SIDE
I
of our running plays. Our tight ends take 3· to 4·foot splits.
Smaller line splits have reduced the distance for the backs hitting o OO®OOO
I

in the off·tackle area; this means we have a shorter distance to go

to attack the perimeter of the defense. If the inside veer is the
SE
o TE
oFL
mainstay of the offense, then it would be better to retain 3·foot
splits. In our veer attack the best three plays are the outside veer,
o 0
the lead option and the counter option. All of these plays attack Diagram 2·5
outside the offensive tackle; therefore, it is advantageous to cut the Pro Right
splits to 2\1'2 feet (Diagram 2·4). In short yardage and goal line
situations, we will generally cut down the line splits to 1 foot in I
order to eliminate the danger of penetration by the defensive line. QUICK SlOE I
I STAONG SIDE
I

QUICK SIDE
3' 2'h'
I
I
I
2'h' I 2'h'
STRONG SIDE
2'h' 3'
o0
SE
008 000
000(8)000 FL
SE 0 TE 0
FL
o 0
o o Diagram 2.6
TWins Left
Diagram 2·4
Line Splits side of the line goes opposite the f .
(Diagram 2.6) Th b I ormatIOn call to the right
Chapter 10. . e un a anced formations will be explained in
aligning personnel The alignment of the two runnin b .
the type of play that has been call d ih ~Cks vanes. according to
e
In identifying our offensive formations, we simply call "right" formation side is the fullback ' th e b
k ack ~ho hnes up to the
or "left." This always designates the two receiver side of the formation strength is the tailback~ D:~in who hnes up away from
formation. We also f1ip·f1op our offensive line according to the two backs interchange posT 1M g games, however, these
and qUicker back runnin t~ Ions: e generally want the smaller
"right" or "left" call. The tight end generally goes to the strong
percent of the time and ~h ~ ~plIon course for the pitch about 75
side, and the split end to the quick side. Therefore, in a tight right dive back approximatel 75e Igger and stronger back will be the
formation the flanker and the strong side of the line will be lined up Ie so that we can so ~ percent of the time. The reason for this
to the right. The quickside guard, tackle and end will be lined up to on the option when metlmes us~ our faster back for the pitch out
the left (Diagram 2·4). Two other basic formations that we employ we are runnmg away from formation strength.
are pro and twins. In the pro right formation, we have our
strongside and flanker to the right with the quicks ide linemen and COiling the I .
split end to the left (Diagram 2·5). Of course, pro left is just the P ay and uSing automatics
opposite. If we call a twins left formation, the flanker and split end ,---The quarterback calls th I .
are aligned to the left as is the quick side of the line. The -nnallon, 2) play 3) e p ay m the follOWing sequence' 1)
, snap Count. He always repeats the s~ap
28 A SIMPLE NUMOERING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUM[)ER/NG SYSTEM
29
count twice, then calls "ready . .. break," and the line then sprints
up to the line of scrimmage. We ask the players to repeat the snap
count one more time in their minds after they break out. This helps
them tremendously in remembering the snap count. After the
quarterback reaches under the center, he calls "set." The line must
be in a ready position for one second before the quarterback calls
"set" so they can go on "first sound" at times from the ready
position. If the play is not called on the "first sound," the line and
the backs go down into their stance on the "set" command. The
quarterback yells out a color and this designates the automatics at Diag ra m 2-7
the line of scrimmage. If blue is the hot color and he calls "blue," 744
then the automatic call is on. If he calls any color other than blue,
we run the play that was called in the huddle. It is obviously
also makes it possible to call pass la s . .
important to change the automatic color from week to week and this has been instrumental in sim ~./. qUlhCkl y 10 ~he huddle, and
even during the game if you have been using automatics p I ymg t e passmg attack.
extensively.
Following the color, the quarterback calls out a number play
twice, such as "44-44." The quarterback then calls "hut 1," "hut
colling the "automatic on one"
2," or "hut 3" and the team fires out on the designated snap count
There is another automatic roced .
that was called in the huddle. All automatic calls are an exception during a game If the team . p . ure that IS sometimes used
to this and the ball will always be snapped on "hut 1." This makes forCing us to ch~nge the plays q~it:uon;:mg multi~le defe~ses and
it easier for the players to remember the snap count once the play the quarterback Simply calls" t e~ at the Ime of scnmmage,
has been changed at the line of scrimmage. Th e team then proceeds up to the au omallc on a ". h
line of . ne 10 t ~ huddle.
One other important point of clarification needs to be stressed the quarterback to call the play at the Ii scnm?,age and lIstens for
at this time. When the quarterback wants to automatic to a 44 has several advantages First I ne. ThIS type of automatic
our
dive, he simply calls the hot color, followed by "44." Since three listen for the automati~ c II' b p ayers must concentrate and
different plays are run with the same backfield action, he must call S eIdam WIll' a ecause they k ' . .
anyone miss this k' d . now It IS commg.
"44-0" in order to automatic to a 44 option, or "44-V" to the line of scrimmage. It is also I~ o~ a~dlble ~hen it· is called at
automatic to a 44 veer. (Example: Using blue as the hot color and since very little time is used in ~ee~~~~;~. our hurry up" offense,
changing the play to a 44 option with an automatic- "Set, blue,
44-0, 44-0, hut 1." The team then executes the 44 option, firing off
on "hut 1.") changing the snap count
Nearly all pass plays can also be called automatically at
line of scrimmage since we use numbers to identify our ten Other types of quick sn
pass patterns. To call a basic pass pattern, we simply call defense off-balance If t ap counts are also used to keep the
number of the pass prior to the play action that will be huddle, the line expiode he ~~arterback calls "first sound" in the
Therefore, if we call a "744," it means that we will use a 7 QIJI.Ifthe quarterback s ~u " rom the ready position on the "set"
pattern with 44 play action. The 7 pattern happens to be a ~~ stance on the "set~a sll secdond sound," the team goes down
pass to the tight end (Diagram 2-7). This makes it possible ..... I' ca an fires out th I
- me goes down ' "Blue" I' . on e co or. (Example:
automatic to any basic pass pattern and to coordinate it with 'IIOunts are another im~ortant -tmef fires out.) These quick snap
nlav action fake quickly and efficiently at the line of scrim mag~ offense. par a any "two minute" or "hurry
30 A SIMPLE NUM[)ERING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUM[)ERING SYSTEM 31

One final point should be made in regard to the snap count. A
series of tackle calls are used to identify the type of blocking
scheme that will be called at the line of scrimmage. Therefore, the
quarterback must hesitate after he calls the two automatic plays
at the line of scrimmage when using the regular snap count, so
that both tackles have time to make their calls. The left tackle
always makes his call first. This is followed by the call of the right
tackle. Of course, only the playside tackle call is live. (Example:
"Set, blue, 744, 744"; quarterback hesitates. Left tackle call and
then right tackle call, "hut 1, hut 2.")
The preceding explanation of our snap count and automatic
system may seem rather complicated at first, but the players have
been able to adapt to it quite readily. The advantages of this
system are rather obvious. First, it is possible to use a wide variety
of change-ups in regard to the snap count. This really helps to
keep the defense off-balance because they never know when the
ball is going to be snapped. The second advantage is that we can
audible to any running or passing play in our entire offense at the
line of scrimmage. The use of audibles has become an increasingly
important part of the game during the past several years because
so many opponents are using the multiple defensive system. When
a team elects to employ multiple defenses, they are trying to
change the defensive weaknesses and strengths around so that it
becomes impossible for the quarterback to know what play to call
when he is in the huddle. This forces the quarterback to wait until
he is at the line of scrimmage to call his play. He must then
analyze the defense and direct his attack at the primary weakness
of the defense. Any offense that cannot make this kind of adjust-
ment at the line of scrimmage is going to have trouble establishing
offensive consistency against a good multiple defensive system.
are using a tight or pro formation as their basic formation have
elected to go with an unbalanced offense that is stronger to the
side o.fthe formation strength. This can readily be seen by simply
countmg the number of people on each side of a mid-line going
through the center and the quarterback. The T formation is
balanced because there are exactly 5V2 players on either side of the
mid-line (Diagram 2-8). If we draw the same mid-line through a
pro or tight formation, it can readily be seen that there is a 6 to 5
ratio which is stronger to the flanker side (Diagram 2-9). If the
offense uses an unbalanced formation, the ratio can actually
become 7 to 4 (Diagram 2-10). This kind of offense will force any
sound defense to make a radical adjustment in order to compen-
sate for the strength of that particular offensive formation.
I
5\\
I
I
o OOUJOOO
(j)
I
O¢O
Diagram 2-8
T Formation
5 6

analyzing defensive strength and weakness

0 00
$
I
000
0
The wide variety of defenses that are being employed at the 0 I 0
present time have also forced the offensive coach to devise a Diagram 2-9
simple system of identifying defensive strengths and weakn~sses. Pro P.ight Formation
The first consideration is to determine whether a particular
defense is balanced or unbalanced. If any team is running a
balanced offensive attack with a T or a wishbone formation, ~= ..... The same numbering system can now be employed by the
opponents will usually employ a balanced defense. Teams whl . defenSlVe
UIIense to determme . strength. The same line is drawn
 A SIMPLE NUMOEf\ING SYSTEM 33
A SIMPLE NUM[\Ef\ING SYSTEM
32
6
I
I 1 C I c
4 BIB
I M
~
00 OJ 0 0 00 0 E V V E

00~8~00
G)

0
I
I
0
o
I I
I 010
I
Diagram 2-10 .
Unbalanced Slat f',ight Formation Diagram 2-12
Tight f',ight Formation-52-3 Deep Monster Defense
. . the center and quarterback and ex~ends
through the mldpomt?f. the defense is using an Okle 52 Another common adjustment the defensive team may employ
up through the defensive line. if ·t ould be a balanced defense is to slant the defensive line toward the formation strength
defense with a four-~eep ~econ ~r~; f:rmation has a 6 to 5 ratio, (Diagram 2-13). If they do this using a four-deep secondary, it
with a 5V. to 5V. ratio. Sm~e a g t f the offense toward the would again result in a 6 to 5 ratio toward the formation strength.
the quarterback should d;re~t ~o;en~e noW elects to roll the If they elect to slant the line to formation strength using a 52
flanker (Diagram 2-11). I t .~h: monster on or near the line of monster defense, the ratio would now be changed to 4V. to 6V.,
secondary into a thr.ee-deefh:~ormation strength, there wi~1 be a favoring the strength ofthe formation (Diagram 2-14). "Bingo" is
scrimmage at the side of ff The quarterback will now terminology which simply means· that the defense is slanting
. 6 5 (ototheo ense. h
correspondmg to ra I k to and away from his strengt , toward the flanker. Whenever the defense has a 6V. to 4Vz ratio
run a more balanced att~c h Id probably be directed away favoring our flanker side, we will direct every play in the offense to
although the majority of ~~yS s. oUne less man to block and the the Quick side of our line away from our flanker. The reason for this
from formation strengtfu\ I ere::e °therefore increased (Diagram Is obvious. If the defense has made a major adjustment, any play
chances for a success p ay we run to our strength will have little chance for success. This is
2-12). one reason why it is imperative for us to be able to use automatics
or audibles at the line of scrimmage. The offense must be able to
s I attack the defensive weakness if it is going to be successful.
5\\ 5'. C
I Numbering the defense in this way is a valuable teaching tool
I S
C B B for the quarterbacks. It increases the effectiveness of both the
E V ~ V E running and passing attacks. In many games, we have been able to
run more than 80 percent of our plays either to or away from our
ooodJooo
G) 0
flanker strength. This is based entirely on the defense that was
6
employed and the adjustments they used. It is obvious that the
5 I chances for success are increased tremendously if the vast major-
0 I
I
0 Ity of plays are directed at the defensive weakness.
A prime example of this was a semi-final game in the NAIA
Diagram 2-11 llltional play-offs. Our opponents were undefeated and had posted
. 01· 52-4 Defense
Tight f',ight Formation vs. "e
.
 A SIMPLE NUMDEf\ING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUMDEf\ING SYSTEM 35
34
defenses. Whenever the quarterback recognizes a defensive weak-
S 6
c ness, he must use an audible to attack that particular area. The
5 ability to do this is an essential part of any sound offensive system.
c It is certainly a significant factor in winning football games.

establishing sound blocking potterns

o against any defense

o 0 Afj:er the defensive weakness has been identified, the offense

must establish the type of blocking pattern that will be used by the
Diagram 2-13 offensive line to attack each particular defense. Making these
52 l3ing o Defense-4 -Dee p Secondary necessary blocking adjustments at the line of scrimmage is the
most difficult and complicated challenge facing today's football
coach. The offensive line coach has the toughest teaching job on
1 the entire staff. The blocking scheme that is selected must fulfill
IS 6'h c two basic requirements: First, it must be capable of setting up the
c 4'h
BIB M best blocking pattern for each offensive play against every con-
V ~ V E ceivable defense. Second, it must be simple and precise. The

~o"om\OqQ
Q) o
following system of tackle calls was established on the basis of
these two principles.
5 I 6

0 1
0 using the 8 call as the bose-rule block
1
The base-rule block is an 8 call. This is the most basic
Diagram 2-14
blocking pattern used in the entire offense. It is sometimes referred
52 l3ingo Defense-3-Deep Secondary to as "closest man" blocking. When blocking an 8 call, each
d d' the regular season. They offensive lineman's rule is the same: Block the man "head up"
an excellent defensive ~ecor uti~n~;port
g indicated that we had away from the hole; if there is no man head up, then block the first
made one mistake. Their sco d d. ted the majority of our play' man lined up away from the hole. A defender is head up if either of
strong offensive tendencies an. lTecopponents whom they had his feet is aligned on or between an offensive lineman's feet
toward the flanker. Our prev\O~:d defense. To stop our attack. (Diagram 2-15). The only exception would be against a split 4 or
scouted, had employed a b;lan d defense with a 6V2 to 4V2 ratio Iplit 6 defense. Against a split defense, the center and offside
they elected to use an u\b a a;ce directed over 90 percent of our auard and tackle "scoop block" the middle and reach for the
toward our flanker. We, t ere ore, 52 8 A major factor plaYSlde gap (Diagram 2-16). The playside guard and tackle are
. k'd d the final score was ' . . "'POnsible for the playside defensive tackle and linebacker. The
plays to the qUic Sl e an . the ability to exploit
contributing to this offensive success was pial/side tackle blocks the area to his inside gap. If the defensive
defensive weakness. f b ' the defense is also used tackle loops out, he blocks him; otherwise, he seal blocks the
. tern 0 num enng . laebacker to the inside. This blocking adjustment will effectively
This same sys h' \I'ng automatics agalO st
the quarterback when e IS ca I
 A SIMPLE NUM[)EI\ING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUM[)EI\ING SYSTEM 37
36
c

o
Diagram 2-15 Diagram 2-18
44 Dive-8 Call 45 Dive-Wedge [llocl~ing

o
Diagram 2-16
44 Dive-Scoop [l\ocl~
Diagram 2-19
47 Veer-[llocl~ Down
B B

JJJ~
playside gap. On any play hitting outside the offensive tackle, the
tight end and playside linemen "block down'\ on the man in the
Inside gap and the center blocks the gap away from the hole. The
Diagram 2-17 linemen generally cut their line splits down to 1 foot on all 88 calls
44 Veer vs. Stunts to reduce the possibility of defensive penetration.

.a ram 2-16) and will also coverth8

handle the straight defen~: ~~~ile linebackers (Diagram 2-17)· ad the double team block with a 4 call
two common stunts by t d f the call \/Jill be 88 mste
If the defense is using a g~p e ens~ e blocking on any 2, 3,4 The second most common tackle call in the offense is a 4 call.
of 8. On the 88 call, the line wll~~:e(~~a:ram 2-18) and will The 4 call is always a double team at the point of attack, and it is
or 5 hole play betw~en t~e~:~ play outside the offensive hole
&enerally "8 rule" blocking for the other players. A 4 call is used
down on any 6, 7, or bl OCk is a two-man apex at the :!:never. there is a defensive lineman on the offensive tackle and
(Diagram 2-19). The wehdge th blockers all reach and block play IS an outside veer, a lead option or a power play. This
hole on 45 dive), and teo er
36
A SIMPLE NUMOEf\ING SYS1EM

means that the tight end and tackle double team the defensive
I A SIMPLE NUMOEf\ING SYS1EM

c
39

tackle and the other linemen block the defense using the 8 rule
(Diagram 2-20). The only exception is for the center and offside
linemen on all power plays. The plays ide linemen will have the
same blocking assignments, but the offside guard and tackle pull
up through the hole. The center's rule is to block the lineman on
him; if no lineman is on him, he blocks the first lineman to the
offside (Diagram 2-21). Diagram 2-22
45 Veer-4 Call

c
s---
Diagram 2-20
38 Option-4 Call
Diagram 2-23
44 Veer-4 Call

s
tea~
Insidedown on the2-23).
(Diagram noseguard and the tackle blocks the first man
c
defensive man who is to be doubl~~:~ bloc~ and a pivot block. The
The double team includes a

:d
post blocker. To set up the d bl med IS always aligned on the
drives his head betwee~Uth e ~eam, the post blocker fires out
~n turns him away from th eh ~9S of the defensive man and
ngs his hip toward the . ~ 0 e. After making contact he
::~r fro~ splitting the do~~~Z te~~ck~r ~o prevent. the defe~sive
Diagram 2-21 for efenslVe man back off the I' . e IS responsible for driving
56 power-4 Call It :~ ~:? a~ound double_:;:~ob~~;~ d;~ens~ve
the pursuit will be
Ihould ~nslVe man with his ins'd f . e p.lvot blocker steps
JIOIslbl:r mto the defensive man!s ~eoot ~nd dnves his head and
- . th t~ the post blocker and d . ar h~P' He gets as close as
The 4 call may also be used on a 44 or 45 veer. This signifies
double team on the first defensive lineman inside the 4 or 5
Against an even defense, the guard and tackle double team
on the defensive lineman on the offensive guard (Diagram
iIIId e ole. If the defensiv nves ternan back and awa
e, he reacts off the d e bml an slants or closes down to
ou e-team bl oc k an d screens the
th~
Against an odd defense, the center and the playside guard
40 A SIMPLE NUM[)ERING SYSTEM
I A SIMPLE NUMOERING SYSTEM
41

Diagram 2-24
Area [llocl~
on Double Team Diagram 2-25
44 Diye-J Call
linebacker to the inside (Diagram 2-24). This is called an "area
block," and it is always used in any double team situation.

fold blocks for dives and counters

Five other tackle calls are used primarily on dive or counter
plays when a cross block sets up a better angle block for the
offensive line. The I, 2, 3, 11 and 22 calls all involve pulling a
lineman through the hole to block a linebacker. These are
commonly referred to as "fold blocks" and are only used when Diagram 2-26
there is a linebacker at the point of attack. The playside guard is 22 Diye-2 Call
the number "one" man, the tackle is the "two" man, and the tight
end is the "three" man. A single-digit number means he is folding

J6'J ik'
to the inside and a double-digit number means he is folding to the
outside. The 3 call is a fold block between the tight end and the
tackle. The tackle blocks out on the lineman on the tight end, and
the tight end pulls around the tackle and blocks the linebacker
(Diagram 2-25). A 2 call is when the tackle pulls through the hole I
on a linebacker to the inside, and the guard blocks out the Diagram 2-27
defensive lineman to his outside (Diagram 2-26). This call is 46 Diye-22 Coli
used on dive and counter plays hitting inside between the .~""," :
(2, 3, 4 and 5 holes), and both tackle calls are "live" on any 2 or : : : 2-27). If a 22 call is used on .
hole play. The playside tackle call is "live" on all 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 end and tackle just exch any ~Pllon or inside veer, the
hole plays and the offside tackle's call is "false:' lIOnnalIy uses a veer relea ange assignments. The tight end
A 22 call may be used to set up a fold block or an exchange Ilaepitch.1f a 22 call is use:et~nt~h~se plays and blocks force for
assignments between the tackle and the tight end. The tight
blocks down on the man on the tackle and the tackle pulls
to the inside and the t ~I Ig t end blocks down on the first
This is a very effect. ahc e pulls and blocks force for the
the end and blocks an outside linebacker or strong safety sa{ t lVe c ange-up and k .
e y or monster t k . ma es It difficult for a
o ey your light end on the options.
 A SIMPLE NUM[lEl\ING SYSTEM A SIMPLE NUM[lEl\ING SYSTEM 43
42
The 1 call is when the offensive guard pulls up through the
hole to block the linebacker. On all 2 or 3 hole plays. the center
blocks out on the defensive lineman on the guard. The guard pulls
around his block to the inside and blocks the nearest linebacker to
the hole (Diagram 2-28). Diagram 2-28 is an example of a 1 call by
the offside tackle. On all 4. 5. 6 and 7 hole plays. the 11 call may be
used between the playside guard and the tackle. The tackle now
blocks down on the first defensive lineman to his inside and the
guard pulls up through the hole and blocks the nearest linebacker Diagram 2-00
(Diagram 2-29). 44 Dive-5 Ca ll

\ 0 pulling the playside guard

Vv~ Vv One other call used on 0 tio ' ..
001000 ~eans pulling the playside iuar~s and dIVes .IS the G call. which
\ kIcks out the defensive end on ali ~he. plays Ide guard pulls and
secondary force on all G options A .dlves. He pulls and blocks
Diagram 2-28 blocks the man on or first rna .'. gamst odd defenses the tackle
22 Dive-1 Call first linebacker inside (D' n mSlde and the tight end blocks th
t a~ kl e an d the tight end lagram
both bl 2-31)
k ' Ag'
amst even defenses thee
(DIagram 2-32). This may be a ~~ down on the first man inside
o to tight end. me man or a linebacker for the

'66'£'6
,
I
Diagram 2-29
44 Dive-11 Call

A 5 call is the other cross block used by the offensive line. This
is only used when there are two down linemen on either side ofth.
hole that is being attacked. On a 4 or 5 hole play. it involves the 46 G D' Diagram 2-01
guard and the tackle. and on a 6 or 7 hole play. it involves the IVe-G Call (Guard I3locl~s DEl
tackle and the tight end. The outside blocller always goes firat
(Diagram 2-30). The inside man drop steps and kicks out the iockle co lis for th e passing
. game
defensive man to the outside. This call should only be used
the defensive player aligned on the inside man is favoring
outside; therefore. the inside blocker could not block him in
Tackle calls are also u d
Pllslng game. An 8 call 0::
~~ set Ithe blocking pattern for the
ss p ay would be similar to an 8
5 call with a crosS block would be more effective.
 A SIMPLE NUMOEl\ING SYSTEM 45
A SIMPLE NUMOEl\ING SYS1EM
44
s
c

Diagram 2-32
23 G Option-G Call (Guard [llodls Farce)
Diagram 2-34
256-88 Call vs. Split 6 Stunt

,. ,. or first
. man offside . "Man 0 n" a Iways refe t
scnmmage-not a lineback If h rs 0 a man on the line of
B B ,. block him but key the offSid:~'. : e~ ha~e a man on, they will
E V -;, + V ,1./ block (Diagram 2-35). If it is a ~~e a~3 er-If he stunts it is an area

o6 ifQ/0 c;/ a-----"'"

the playside linebacker and hits ~~e :aass,.~he ~uarterback reads
~Iay action passes, the dive back si ck hot if he stunts. On
lInebacker if he comes. This will be ex I~ply bloc~s the playside
when the passing game is covered itdaIn~d fully In later chapters
A big advantage of this block. etad.
on the noseguard or on the plaYSidIn~e acs~~e~~
e If It i.s
IS the double
an even team
defense.
Diagram 2-33
944-8 Call with Area [lIod,ing

call on a run. The line will still use closest man blocking rules S ··HOT"
except against a stunting defense. The offensive linemen then c
block the defensive players coming into their area. This is referred
to as 8 call with area blocking (Diagram 2-33). The 88 call is also
used for play action passes against gap defenses. The line blocks
the first man or gap away from the play action. (Example: rarP On
even-numbered play action-block gap to the left. See Diag
2-34.) The center and offside lineman cup block to the back side.
One other type of pass protection is a 2 call and can be
with certain dropback passes or on play action passes. Our
series is a flood series off dropback action with a hot receiver. 012 Diagram 2-35
playside tackle call is now a 2 call and the offside tackle call is a (Q Pattern)-2 Call and 1 Call
r"ll . The rule for the center and playside guards is to block
 A SIMPLE NUMIJERING SYSTEM 47
A SIMPLE NUMIJERING SYSTEM
46 pass blocking:
You have great angle blocks and it is easy to pick up stunting
linebackers. When the offensive lineman blocks down. this also
freezes the playside linebacker because the blocking scheme looks
1 call-Tum-out block'mg. Guard a d t k
second down linemen awa
Oman.
t
ac Ie take the first and
y rom the center. Center takes
just like
The the inside isveer.
following a brief and concise summary of the tackle call 8 call-Man blocking . your area . If man comes to your area
you block him 10
system and blocking patterns: 88 call-Used on play act· passes Block fi t •
Sl'd e away from IOn
the I ' . rs man or gap to the
r b p ay aclion Eve
ac lon, lock gap to the Ieft Odd'
b
n-num ered play
tackle calls: block gap to the right C . -numbered play action
1 call-Guard through the hole on a linebacker. Cross block 2 calI-A double-team bl k' up on backside. '
y playside guard or tackle blo~~~ or efensive tackle
b oc on a noseg d d
with center on 2 and 3 hole plays.
11 call-Guard through the hole to the outside on a linebacker. have a linebacker oil th y 109 down when they
Tackle blocks down and guard pulls around and blocks play action, on 12-13 ac~~' (Onffl . used on plays ide. on
the linebacker (4. 5. 6 and 7 hole plays). call.) IOn-o Side call is always a 1
2 call_Tackle through the hole on a linebacker. Guard blocks
out on the lineman on your tackle (2. 3. 4 and 5 hole
plays). live call rules:
22 call_Tackle through the hole to the outside and blocks
linebacker or force. Tight end blocks down on first man
to be careful not to use a d e~al~ are "live." Tackles need
1. On 2 and 3 holes-both tackl
to inside (6. 7. 8 and 9 hole plays).
2. 4. 5,"6. 7, 8 and 9 h 0 Ies-calls
ou ear call.
e "rIve " on the playside
3 call-Tight end through the hole on a linebacker. Tackle
an false" on the offside
blocks out on the lineman on tight end. d
4 call-Double team at the hole. Others block 8 call rules. 3. Tackle line will
and thecalls goesbedomad \~. ft er the quarterback yells "set"
44 call-Double team near linebacker to the hole. call first and the rig~~~ckl: left tackle always makes his
5 call-Cross block at the hole. with outside man going first. second sound" I'S an automatic second.
Use this when the two offensive linemen on either side of 8 IIAny play on "first or
tackle calls out a d'ff ca unless the playside
the hole have down linemen on them. "set." I erent call before quarterback yells
8 call-Man head up. block him away from the hole.
_No man head up. look to the inside or away from the
The for
pattern offensive
each tackles
run are responslble
. for setting the block'
hole for a man to block.
adJ::e. The tackle-call system mak~ ~gams~ every conceivable
_GenerallY. if there is a head up stack (or split look) on del or pass p i a ' 109

the guard. the playside guard and tackle must block
them; if on the center. the guard and center will block
them.
88 call-In the 2. 3. 4 and 5 holes. it is a wedge block. In 6. 7, 8
and 9 holes. each man blocks down on the first man to
the inside or away from the hole.
G call_Playside guard pulls and blocks out the defensive end on
G dives and blocks force on G options.
aItI Ito every defense or stunt at th s I~ pOSSible for the offense to
bloc~~ part of the entire offense ~ me of s~ri~mage. This is a
tack I~g angles on nearly ever ecause It msures optimum
the Ie IS often more important ~hplay; therefore. the call by the
quarterback. Intelligent tacklean th~ actual play selection by
s rna e coaching a lot easier.
 smETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEf\IMETEf1, 49

Diagram 3-1
46 Veer
Stretching the
either give to the dive back, keep it himself or pitch to the offside
Defensive Perimeter back. The fact that the play can hit in anyone of three places
outside the defensive tackle helps to stretch the defensive perime-
with the outside Veer ter to the breaking point. In order to stop the play, the defense
must have a player to tackle the dive back, the quarterback and
the pitch back, plus a deep back to cover the flanker on a possible
pass pattern. Four defensive players must therefore be outside the
defensive tackle, and this is an impossibility in any sound defensive
alignment. If the defense loosens up their inside linebackers to
. ensive team has one play that they help take the dive back or quarterback, then they will be extremely
Nearly every effectlv~ off. They select one single play. as vulnerable to a counter play up the middle or to any kind of
depend upon in critical situatIOns.. e system-it is the play which bootleg or reverse. It may also be possible ·for the offensive
v
the backbone of their entire offenstl The play in our offense that lineman to drive the linebacker past the hole on the outside veer
d f nse cannot sop.
they believe the e ~. . the outside veer. 01 whenever they play this loose technique.
fits the above descnptt~n IS d the outside veer for a number. h Another inherent advantage in developing a great off·tackle
Our offense was bUIlt ar~~nh ttacks the off-tackle hole WI~ play is that it tends to open up the middle and/or the outside of the
reasons. First, it is a .f~ay ~a:~idea running back can hit the 0 ~ defense. When the defense knows that they must stop an offense in
amazing quickness.. e p an other offensive back beca~se the off-tackle area, they often overcompensate and create a
tackle hole m~c~ qUlc~~r ~~~; th~refore, the offensive line ~\II~: weakness either up the middle or on the outside containment. In
his close proximity. t~1 \ for as long before the pla~ bre: . s an I other words, when the wide veer is effective, then all of the other
have to secure thetr oC s ff .de running back or tallbac In plays become more explosive.
the secondary.. A fullbhack ,Olo~ger distance to go when
formation obviously .as a 1
the off-tackle area (Dlagr.a7h~-t;iple option at the point o\le Q great short yardage play
A second advanta.ge ISmost defenses, the playside tac all
This means that, agamst ble team down and seal The final reason for selecting the outside veer as the bread-
the tight end will be able t~ d~U will then read the defense play in our offense is that it is our best play in short
in.ide pursuit. The quarter ac and goal line situations. Offensive proficiency is critical
50 STRETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETER
STf1,ETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETER
whenever the ball is inside the 10 yard line or in any third and 51
c
short yardage situation. A bad play or a mistake at this point often
makes the difference between winning and losing. Our best play c
over the past six years in these critical situations has been the E
outside veer. In fact, it is the play we will run between 60 and 80
percent of the time when we are in a "make it or break it"
situation. An example of the play's effectiveness in short yardage
situations was vividly apparent in our final statistics several years
ago. We were inside the opponent's 10 yard line 24 times, and we
scored 20 times. We fumbled twice and we were stopped twice by
penalties. Our opponents were inside our 10 yard line 13 times and Diagram J.2
they only scored twice. This means that we scored 83 percent of 46 Veer vs. Gap 8-88 Call
the time compared to our opponent's 15 percent scoring, and that
is what wins football games.
Most defensive teams will use either a variation of a gap 8
defense or a 65 defense in short yardage situations. The defense
must stop any quick·hitting play between the tackles and cannot
afford to hit and read. The offensive line splits will now be cut down
to 1 foot to help eliminate defensive penetration and to shorten the
distance to the defensive perimeter. This also helps to set up wedge
blocking in case the quarterback elects to run an inside play. On
the outside veer, the offensive line now blocks down to seal off
pursuit. Against a gap 8 defense, the play is nearly unstoppable
(Diagram 3·2). The offensive line has great angles on the defense Diagram J.J
and it is easy to cut off penetration. If the defensive end takes the 47 Veer vs. 65 Defense
dive back, you can score on either the keep or the pitch. Against
the 65 defense, it is equally effective (Diagram 3·3). Here, the
percent. This takes the p
quarterback keeps or pitches depending on the play of the the fi Id Th ressure off the mo t .
linebacker. He will, of course, give the ball to the dive back if the e . . e quarterback is human a s Important player on
DefensIVe players are getting better .nd poor reads are inevitable.
defensive end does not tackle him. The amazing thing is that the
!/Our quarterback's confidence' B WI~~ false keys. Do not destroy
outside veer has been effective a number of times even when the
Iuccessful 100 percent of the 'ti~:oslhve! Tell him that no play is
quarterback has made a poor read.
:ecuted proper/y, the back will g '. but when the outside veer is
OU will score on the play fro 0 mto the end zone standing up
: - 50 percent of the time s';; :ny,~here inside the 10 yard line a~
quarterback execution on the read Bys and you will score!' on worry about it. You have four
..__ Another fact that the tea
One very important coaching point should be stressed at --Inevitable. Thi . m should realize is that fumbl
time. We tell our quarterback that we only expect him to make t s IS not a negative es are
proper read 75 to 80 percent of the time on any triple option. ~ltae.ka,ems has ever gone throu h approach-~t is only realistic.
are a part of life' G ~ h ~ season WIthout a fumble
if he guesses every time, the play would be successful 50 percent
The important thi~g ~Ot t Its by the defense will caus~
the time, so he only has to be right half the time to hit 75 or
OUr entire squad before ev:C orget about it once it occurs.
y game not to worry about the
 smETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEI\IMETER 53
STPHCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEI\IMETER
52 key coaching points for the outside veer
mistakes, just to have fun and play with reckless abandon, because
when a play does break in the veer offense, it results in a . Several coaching points need t b .
touchdown. One common criticism of the veer offense is that WIth a coach playing the def . 0 e emphaSIzed. First begl·n
. enslve end H h I '
fumbles are more apt to occur. This simply is not the case. In one commItments between taking th d. . e s ou d make obvious
season, we ran the ball 582 times and lost 13 fumbles; our ~~en a quarterback is initiall le:r ~ve back or the quarterback.
opponents had 388 running plays and lost 20 fumbles. This means IS Imperative that easy read/hI ~~g to read the outside veer it
we fumbled one out of 45 running plays and our opponents the play. As his execution imp e p 1m develop his confidence'in
fumbled one out of 19 running plays. Many other veer offensive defensive end in pads who varie:ov~s, the ~oach is replaced by a
to destroy the play and for hIS techmques and actually tries
teams can statistically validate this same point. . hI ce poor reads Th d ·11
Ig Ycompetitive and the def .
end·. IIe n now becomes
h . knock the quarterback
except
enslve
t th IS a owed to do anything
teaching the mesh by the dive bock ing point, requiring more emp~ .e ~~ound. The primary coach-
quarterback must stay on the lin:s~s ~n any other, is that the
The coaching points for teaching the outside veer to the mesh must always remain constant sc"m~age. The pOint of the
offensive backs are relatively uncomplicated. The playside back for the quarterback to move back fro· Ther~ IS a natural tendency
dives at the outside hip of the offensive tackle. The quarterback approaches the dive back and th. m the Ime of scrimmage as he
must stay on the line of scrimmage as he goes down the line and play. I~ teaching the play: have t~: one mis!~k.e will destroy the
meshes with the dive back behind the offensive tackle. His arms the pomt of the mesh clearly id t.fic~rrect mlltal alignment and
are fairly extended and he rides the dive back with the ball and that the players hit that same .::~s~ e .on the ground, and insist
keys the first defender outside the block by the tight end. If this The reason why thO . pomt every time
h . IS IS so critic I· h .
defensive player tackles the dive back, he then pulls the ball and w. 0 IS removed from the point of thea IS t at a defensive player
options on the next defensive player who shows. The dive back hits gIve or the keep by the qu t b mesh can wait and read the
the mesh area behind the tackle with his inside elbow high and his . ar er ack Th· ·11 d
since one defender can then h. IS WI estroy the play
outside arm at a 90 degree angle extending along his waist with 3.4). When the play is execut~~ver t e first two options (Diagram
the palm up. This forms the pocket for the ball. The dive back the point of the mesh will be t pr~perlY on the line of scrimmage
must run through the ball and is primarily responsible for a good
mesh with the quarterback. The quarterback is reading the
will have to take either the d~~ ~~~~ to the defensive end, and h~
simply not have sufficient time t d or the quarterback. He will
defense and therefore cannot look the ball into the pocket the way either the give or kee Thi ? r~a . the mesh and then react to
he can on a predetermined handoff on a dive play. The dive back defensive tackle on thPe·. .ds pomt IS Just as valid when readl·ng
mSI e veer. a
then puts a "soft squeeze" on the ball as the quarterback rides him
through the decision-making area. The dive back must assume
that the quarterback is giving him the ball until he actually feels
the ball being pulled away by the quarterback. At this point, it II
critical not to "over-coach" in regard to the mesh and the read by
the quarterback. This is one of the most common mistakes made
by coaches teaching the triple option. Do not make the play mOIl
complicated than it actually is! The only way for the quarterback
and dive back to properly learn to mesh is through constant
tion and drill. Run the play in practice a thousand times with Diagra m 3-4
backs going against a single defensive end, and the 46 Veer-Q[3 Too Deep
execution will develop naturally.

ST[\[fCHING THE DEFENSIVE PE[\IM[fE[\
54
dditional responsl'b'I't
I I Y after the
The dive back has one a He must either get tadded or else
quarterback has pulled the b~I~lock the first defensive ~Ia'yer ~ho
explode through the hole a~ bl k generally on an tnslde hne-
shows from the inside. T~IS o~e' between a 3 yard gain an~ a
backer, often makes the dlffere: to all of the backs that thi~ ktnd
s
touchdown . The coach mus~ stre s It requires a combination of
of extra effort wins footba~ ga;: ~otallY unselfish attitude.
toughness, pride, teamwor an
ST[\[fCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEr.IMEfEIl 55
chances for long runs increase tremendously. One of two 'things
can happen. Either the secondary collapses on the quarterback
and the pitch breaks for big yardage, or else the secondary elects
to cover the pitch and the quarterback is free. A quick fake pitch
by the quarterback can also help to break him free for a big gainer.
To help perfect this relationship, instruct the quarterback to
always pitch the ball after he is 5 or more yards downfield when
the backs are practicing this play against a single defensive end.
Later, you may add a defensive safety who is optioned off down-
field. Repetition and drill are again the keys to execution.

the pitch relationship is critical \ executing the pitch

t .de veer has one primary respon-
The pitch back on the ou Sl t back as far as possible and
'b·l·ty' to get out in front of the quar er A good pitch relation- Once the quarterback has pulled the ball from the dive back,
Sl I I • t back turns up. . he gets ready immediately for the pitch. He adjusts the ball so that
turn upfield when the quar er and the pitch back is essential ?n it is in his hand nearer the pitch back. (Example: right hand on 46
ship between the quarter.bac\ack must sprint to the opposite veer.) The fingers are on top ofthe ball and the thumb is pointing
any option play. The pitch to et outin front ofthe quarterbac~ down. The pitch is made with a flick ofthe wrist, and the extension
sideline and make every effort f~r the pitch. If the pitch back IS of the elbow and the thumb should be pointing down after the
b at least two or three steps he defender has time to fOf(:e the
directly behind the quarterb~ctk, ~Ie the pitch back on the hne of
release of the ball. This type of pitch has a much quicker release
ac than the old "push pass" lateral which ended with the fingers and
Pitch and still react out an d .d r the play can attack the
uicker an WI e thumb all pointing up. The quarterback must also be ready to
scrimmage. Th e q t the chances for success. pitch immediately after the initial read because of the threat of a
defensive perimeter, the grea er
safety or corner blitz. A stunt in the secondary could force a quick

en double read which requires an instant reaction on the pitch.

Generally, the secondary support will be further removed from the
read and the quarterback will then turn upfield. Once he is in the
secondary, he must relocate his pitch back and execute the option
In the open field. It is generally safer now to fake the pitch and
keep the ball, but he will pitch if he is attacked and if a good pitch
relationship has been maintained with the trailing back.

blocking patterns for the outside veer

Diagram 3-5 The line play for the outside veer is identical to the blocking
46 Veer (Turn Upfie\d) rules for the lead option and is similar to the power plays. The
46·47 veer will be diagrammed against every conceivable defense.
. d he itch back must turn
Once the quarterback turns upf~.1 ,tutsirle at a distance: These diagrams will also be helpful in identifying the blocking
patterns for the lead option and the powers in the following
up with him and try to ~eep to 3-~) ~hen this kind of pit chapters.
approximately 5 yards. (D~ag:;:yond' the line of scrimmage,
relationship can be matntatne
56 smETCHING THE DEFENSIVE pmlMETER
STRETCHING THE DEFENSIVE pmlMETER
57
Against an Okie 52 defense, the tight end and the tackle
double team the defensive tackle, and the quarterback reads the
defensive end (Diagram 3-6). Ifthe linebacker is tight, the playside
guard fires out and blocks him away from the hole. There is a good
chance that a tight linebacker will get tied up in the double team.
The guard has several options against a linebacker who plays a
loose technique several yards back from the line. The guard may
elect to fire out and drive him past the hole, or else he may pull
around the double-team block and lead up the hole. The double
team by the tackle and the tight end is an area block. If the tackle
can block him by himself, the tight end slides off and blocks the
Diagram 3-7
inside linebacker.
47 Veer-8 Switch Call-Ol~ie Slant Defense

Diagram 3-6 Diagram 3-8

46 Veer-Ol~ie52 Defense
46 Veer-11 Call-Ol~ie Slant Defense
Against an Okie slant defense, the tackle may use an "8 again double team the defensive
switch" call. The tight end fires out on the monster, the guard I~nebacker (See Diagram 3-5) ~~kle and the center blocks the
reach blocks for the slant tackle, and the tackle blocks the scrape linebacker again and the t' ere may be a loose middle
linebacker to the inside (Diagram 3-7). The tight end blocks the hole. cen er may have to block him past the
defensive end if he is playing anchor or "6 technique" head up on
your tight end. The center and offside guard then area block the
noseguard and offside linebacker. The guard reach blocks and the attacking the stack-gap defense
center cuts off the offside linebacker. Against a stack-ga d ~ .
Another call the tackle may use against a slant defense is an lIlalic to the off-tackle toleeaense, It is generally better to auto-
11 call. The tackle blocks the man on him since he is slanting down
and the guard pulls around the tackle's block and picks up the Ide, it is better to use G .
t
!:s~ays to block this defenseW~it~O; e .noseguard. There are
e e enslVe end is shading the
scrape linebacker. The tight end again blocks the monster or
anchor end (Diagram 3-8).
::~ the play (Diagram 3~) l~~~ a~d fUll. the playside guard to
e, an 11 call may be . e e enslve end is head up or
The blocking against a pro 43 defense is nearly identical to ~ackle and blocks the~?rebeff~ctive. The guard pulls around
tho hlockin!l against an Okie defense. The tight end and sive end. The quarter~ne ka~ er. The tight end blocks the
ac IS generally able to keep and
 STI\ETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEI\IMETEI\ 59
ST!\ETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEI\IMETEI\
58 linebacker. He can fire straight out and block him, but if the
linebacker is outside conscious, it is better to pull around the tight
c end's block (Diagram 3·11). The tight end blocks the defensive end
either in or out and the dive back cuts off his block. The
quarterback reads the defensive end and gives the ball to the dive
back if he sees daylight. He pulls the ball if the defensive end fights
the block and tries to tackle the dive back. This blocking pattern
generally works better against a defensive end who is penetrating
hard in the end·tackle gap because the quarterback can stay on
the line of scrimmage. The play is ineffective whenever the
quarterback is forced too deep off the line and the block on the
Diagram 3·9 defensive end will prevent this from happening.
47 Veer-G Call

th lay is run toward the defensive

option the safety or corner. ~ .;:the center so that both guards
strength, it is better to re~~ :1 kers This would require a 4 call
have angle blocks on the me ac .
for the double team (Diagram 3·10).

c Diagram 3·11
47 Veer-8 Coll-Tocil le Leads

The second blocking variation is a 44 call. A 44 call is a

double team on the linebacker, as opposed to a 4 call which is a
double team on a lineman. The quarterback reads the defensive
end for the give or keep (Diagram 3·12). If the defensive end is
Diagram 3·10 head up or favoring the outside, it may be better to use an 88 call.
46 Veer-4 Call The tackle then combo blocks on the defensive tackle and inside
linebacker (Diagram 3·13). The quarterback again reads the
blocking the pro 43 defense defensive end. This blocking pattern is more effective in sealing off
pursuit from the inside and should be used whenever the offense
ral additional problems for th;
A defense that poses seve t. es referred to as a 26 or 2 cannot handle the defensive tackle or middle linebacker.
.. ·d" 0 43 some 1m ·t II The 46·47 keep has also been effective against a wide pro 43
46.47 veer is a WI e pr r ' on the offensive tackle, so I
defense. The dive back hook blocks the defensive end and the
defense. There is no down I~e~~; team. Three different blo~k!~:
quarterback sprints arou~d the block and options the safety or
more difficult to execute a ff °ctively against this defense. aIlv
::r. The blocking pattern is a 44 call or an 88 call and the key
variations ca~ b~ ~~ed t~eeinside of the tight end, it is gl~ni~r tilt that must be secured is the block by the tight end on the
defensive end IS s a m~ The tackle's man on an 8 ca
better to use an 8 ca .
 SWITCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEI\IMETEI\ STI\ETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEI\IMETEI\ 61
60
...._ _ -s s blocking patterns against split defenses
Against a split 4 defense. the tackle will call either 8 or 11. The
playside tackle and guard are always responsible for blocking the
defensive tackle and inside linebacker. The tight end blocks the
outside linebacker. The center and the offside lineman reach block
toward the playside gap (scoop block) so that they can effectively
pick up any stunts by the middle linebacker (Diagram 3-15). The
dive back may have to cut outside the tight end's block if the
outside linebacker closes to the inside. The tackle should try to
combo block the defensive tackle and inside linebacker. This
Diagram 3-12
means he would first hit the defensive tackle with his inside
47 Veer-4 4 Call
shoulder and then slide off the block and seal the linebacker to the
inside. If the linebacker is quickly flowing to the outside, or if the
defensive tackle is in the gap, then an 11 call may be necessary
(Diagram 3-16).

Diagram 3-13
46 Veer-55 Call

s Diagram 3-15
46 Veer- 5 Ca ll

Diagram 3-14
47 Keep-44 Call

3 14) This is another effective d

outside linebacker (Diagram . - . . g problems on the rea Diagram 3-16
handle a defensive end who IS causm 46 Veer-11 Call
• _ .. ~ 'n tho ,mel-tackle gap.
62 STf\ETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETER
STRETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETEr.
63
If the defense elects to stunt the inside linebackers, the
blocking patterns remain the same. The playside tackle and guard s
block the defensive player (linebacker or tackle) who attacks their
inside gap. The center and offside guard and tackle all reach to the
playside gap. This scoop block technique eliminates the danger of
penetration by the defense (Diagram 3-17). Stunts also hinder
defensive pursuit and increase the probability of a long run. For
this reason, most defensive coaches are reluctant to run stunts
against a veer offense. The gamble involves too much risk against
a veer team that effectively uses the scoop blocking scheme.

Diagram 3-18
46 Veer-Split 6 Defense

minutes every day. Players will not I .

\ of their men by Simply being told the~r.n ~o get theIr heads in front
\ they must experience it! a It IS the proper technique_
Diagram 3-17
47 Veer-Split 4 Stunts-Scoop I3l ocl~i n g the near shoulder block
There is one exception in wh· h t
use an 88 call against a split 6 defense not be used. If the defensive man ~~
becomes imperative to use a"
f
~r sh~?lder block should
p a~mg a soft technique," it
Against a split 6 defense, the blocking pattern remains the reading lineman is not penetratin near s o~lder block." A soft or
same for everyone except the playside tight end. The tackle uses or
pursuit will be much better Th ga c~ashmg hard and his lateral
an 88 call so that the tight end knows to block down on the hIS near shoulder into the hip of th d ~line~an must now drive
· . e ouenslVe
defensive end. This defense is extremely vulnerable to an outside head will be between the man and e e enslVe ~an so that his
veer because all of the playside linemen have excellent angle defenSive player from slipping off th t~~ h~le. ThIs. prevents the
blocks (Diagram 3-18). If they stunt the middle linebackers, it Penetration is no longer a dan e oc ~nd fillmg the hole.
simply becomes a gap 8 defense, and the chance for breaking a technique. The near shoulderg~~ b~ca~se he IS playing a waiting
long run increases tremendously. The tight end's block is the key blocking down on a linebacker toO~he s. o~ld also be used when
to the success of the play. When blocking down, he must step first lineman must not only be abl mSlde. Any good offensive
with his inside foot and fire his head in front of the defensive man', blocks, but he must also be ab~eto pro.perly execute each of these
near hip. He makes contact with his far shoulder and must drive block at the right time Th. to IqUlckly react and use the right
the man laterally to the inside. His head is positioned in front of repetition in practice a~ai~:tc:~ on ~ b~.learned through constant
the defensive man to prevent any penetration. Penetration by the up on their charge. enslve memen who are changing
defensive player will force the quarterback off the line of scrim-
mage and this can destroy the play. This block is referred to as B
"far shoulder block" and should be used by any offensive lineman adjusting to a 53 or 71 defense
who is blocking down on a hard-charging defensive lineman. Th. Blo k·
entire offensive line should practice this block for at least several 1_. c 109 a 53 defense requires n 8 II
P-yside guard must handle th .ddal ca, and the center and
e m1 e stack. This will be another
 smETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PEf\IMETER STRETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETER 65
64
area block if they stunt to the gaps. The defensive tackle must
generally favor the inside and this sets up good angle blocks to
seal off the inside pursuit. The tight end blocks the outside
linebacker and the dive back cuts off his block (Diagram 3-19). If
the defense tightens up into a 71 defense. the tackle would be on
the guard and the defensive end would be aligned on the offensive
tackle. This is again a gap 8 situation. and an 88 call would be in
order. The playside linemen would all block the first man to their
inside with the playside guard and center still responsible for the Diagram 3-20
46 Yeer-65 Defense-Safety 13litz
middle stack.

the I-foot splits jam up the middle a P .

becomes almost impossible (D' nd3 enetratJon by the safety
Th th lagram -20)
e 0 er stunt from the 65 d f .
: e~s~ o~curs when the defen-
E
sive ends and tackles crash th
used in very short yardage sit r~.ug t e InsIde gaps. This is often
the middle. When this happe~a t~ns ~o protect against a wedge up
it were a gap 8. The tight end ~Ioc~~ t: nd blocks th~ defen~e as if
nse
The tackle will be able to handle th de t .as he pInches Inside.
and the quarterback should have e e enslve tackle by himself,
Diagram 3·19 The safety must now stop II th an ea~y read (Diagram 3-21).
46 Yeer-8 Call-53 Defense
impossible. Against a balan~ed 6~e~ ~PtJons. which is virtually
r~cts most of the plays toward thee ense. the quarterback di·
attacking the 65 goal line defense lInebackers or slant the I' h flanker. If they shift the
W'th
I two tight ends the Ine.bl k'e attacks away from t h e flanker.
Against the traditional 65 goal line defense. a 4 call should be either side; therefor~ it is ~c. ;ng patterns remain identical to
used and the line must cut down to I-foot splits. The tight end and weakness in any goal'line situ~:i~n~asy to attack the defensive
tackle double team the defensive tackle. The plays ide guard
generally blocks the middle linebacker. and the center and offside
guard reach block the playside gap (See Diagram 3-3). The 8
quarterback reads the defensive end for the give or keep. The
46-47 veer is definitely our most effective play against the 65
defense.
There are two common stunts often used by teams who
employ a 65 defense. The most common stunt is to crash the two
safeties through the guard-tackle gap. The blocking pattern reo
mains the same but the playside tackle must constantly be aware
of this danger. He keys the safety as he starts his post block on the Diagram 3-21
double team. If the safety crashes. he reacts to the inside and 47 Yeer-4 Ca ll vs. 65 Tight
knocks him to the middle. This is a relatively easy block becaU18
 STRETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETER STRETCHING THE DEFENSIVE PERIMETER 67
66
for the
the quarterback since the \'mebacker will usually be flying to
outside.
blocking adjustments w ith the 44 call
T~e final advantage of a doo-d .
and a doo-dad block confusIOn for the defense Wh th ad b!ock IS that it creates
The offense often evolves according to defensive adjustment ~e is generally responsibie fo:~he e defenSive end is base blocked.
If the tight end releases 'I n'd W.qhuarterback. but takes the dive
and this has certainly occurred with the outside veer. Defensive SI e. It thed d dbl
coaches began keying the release of the tight end and. if he longer sure of his assignment and in . ?O- a ock. he is no
aggressiveness (Diagram 3-2::i). decIsion always takes away
blocked down. the defensive end would close for dive and the
linebacker would scrape outside for quarterback (Diagram 3-22).
The defensive end would also align head up on our tight end. He
would deliver a hard blow to the tight end when he closed inside
and this made the double-team block far more difficult.

,
Diagram 3-23
46 Veer-44 Call

Diagram 3-22 why the outside veer is our bread an d b utter

46 Veer-4 Call

In .our entire offense. We work on e;ee~ IS ~h~ most critical play

As we stated before. the outside .
To counteract this defensive adjustment. you can change from dnll more on the execution of th p 46ectmg 7 It 10 practice. and we
a 4 call to a 44 call. The 44 call means that the tight end and play. We ran the play 111 times in :1 -4 ~eer than on any other
offensive guard will double team the linebacker. and the offensive more than any other play It games 10 one season. 28 times
s per ~arry and we
tackle will single block the defensive tackle. The tight end noW we f . averaged 6 5 yard
re ortunate enough to score 18 tim ' .
uses a "doo-dad block." which means that he first base blocks the players believe it is almost im . es with the outside veer. Our
defensive end for one count before releasing inside to block the hel~s make it happen. The pia ~u:~slble to stop. and believing it
linebacker. This doo-dad block accomplishes several things. First. penmeter of any defense Th y ~ f p~ts too much pressure on the
it makes it impossible for the defensive end to keep your tight end out because each player ~ust ~e ~ ensl~e pursuit becomes spread
off the linebacker. You will get the linebacker sealed inside and the of the veer-the dive. the kee omml~ed to stopping one phase
quarterback will be free if the defensive end takes dive. The second gOing to break big! p or the pitch. When it breaks. it's
advantage is that the doo-dad block prevents the defensive end
from penetrating and hitting the mesh between the dive back and
the quarterback. The quarterback has time to read for give or keep
and he is not forced back off the line of scrimmage. If the defensive
end fires inside through the end-tackle gap. the tight end locks up
on him and blocks him down to the inside. This will be a give read
 rEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER 69

Diagram 4-1
45 Veer vs. Ollie Defense

new defensive innovations to stop the veer

Teaching the Execution
The first major defensive innovation was to bring the defensive
of the Inside Veer tackle and end hard to stop the dive and the keep. Quick
penetration by the tackle and the end forced the quarterback off
the line of scrimmage and made the double read much more
difficult. Fumbles plagued many veer offenses. The secondary
support also improved with the development of nine-man fronts
and a two-deep zone or a quickly rotating four-deep secondary.
Many teams also loosened up their linebackers, who flowed
quickly to the outside to help on the keep or pitch.
.. t d from running the inside The "slow play" defensive end was another effective defensive
The triple option c~ncep~.ongmat e The offensive line double innovation that caused problems for the veer. The slow play end
veer from a split ~ac~field a ~t~e;u~suit. The quarterback then would freeze on the line of scrimmage, force the pitch, and then
teams down to the .mslde to .se uard-tackle gap and reads the sprint to the sideline for support on the pitch. When this technique
the
h
11
meshes with the dIve bac; m b off if the tackle doesn't close was executed properly, one player could take away two options-
defensive tackle. He .ha~ s ~ ~ t:e defensive tackle does take the the keep and the pitch. When this happens, the veer or option is no
down and take the dlvbe akc . II the ball and options the defensive longer a viable play.
dive back, the quarter ac pu s Another adaptation against the inside veer was to remove the
end (Diagram 4-1). I this same triple option concept to defensive player from the pOint of the mesh. A linebacker who was
Coaches went on to apPhY . hb ne The inside veer became far enough removed from the point of the mesh could read the give
. d then to t e WIS 0 •
the I formatIOn an. . ff nsive football. At first many teams or keep and again effectively stop two of the options.
a play that revoluttonlzed 0 e b t then the defenses began to
experienced phenom~nal su~c~ss, s :ere developed which caused
catch up. New def~ns~ve tec nlque ief anal sis of some of those offensive adjustments to changing defenses
Problems for the mSlde veer. A br I. y how the inside veer
. . ·11 help to exp am . Each new defensive innovation caused the offense to make
defensive mnovattons WI . t f the total veer offensIVe
adapted and evolved as an effectIve par 0 adjUstments to restore the play's effectiveness. The first change
package.
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEE!\ 71
TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEE!\
70
. t liminate the possibility of the fast use a check veer release against a fire end
many coaches mad~ was 0 e do this was to no longer run a true
double read. The easiest way to b k would call a dive or an The inside veer can be blocked in a variety of ways against
triple option. Instead, the quarter ~c d The quarterback would each defense. We prefer to 8 call the veer the majority of the time
redetermtne .
option and the pIay was P f h d' was called and would always and still read the first man on or outside our tackle for the give or
always hand the ball off i t e I~~ The line would simply use 8 keep (Diagram 4-3).
fake the dive if the play wa~ an ~~ ;~~~ way the tackle was always If the opponents like to "fire" their defensive end, our tight
call or closest man blocktng. d hit the point of the mesh end will use a "check veer release:' This means that he check
blocked and he could not penetrat~ an me much safer from the blocks the defensive end for one count before veer releasing to
(Diagram 4-2). The offense noW encoat nearly as explosive as it block force. It is important to make this adjustment in order to
. 0 f turnovers , but it was h d been eliminated an d t h e
standpotnt give the quarterback time to complete his first read and still have
once had been. The double tea; ff :s effectively as it had been time to pitch the ball as he reads the crashing end on a fire stunt.
inside pursuit was no longer cu 0
with veer blocking.
c c
c\ 8

E6 V
Diagram 4-3
45 Veer-8 Call vs. Ol~ i e 52 Defense
Diagram 4-2
44 Option-8 Call

h' losest man blocking scheme, reading the veer with scoop blocking
Other teams elected to use tl IS Ct' The quarterback would
trip e op ton.
but still read the pIa.y as a kl If he was effectively blocked the The next offensive innovation was to incorporate the scoop
still read the defensive tac
quarterback would hand 0 ff k b
;i the defensive tackle whipped the
Id pull the ball and option the
block with the inside veer read. The plays ide tackle uses a slip
technique, by which he fires out hard through the outside shoulder
offensive tackle, the quart~r ~c wou the chances of the play's of the defensive tackle. If the tackle hits him straight on or loops
ed
end. This innovation agal~ I~~r~sa~etter than the old "dive and out, he blocks him out. But if the tackle slants inside, he slips off
success when re~d proper y. back can read it, because there Is the block and then continues on upfield and seals the linebacker.
option" concept If the quarter k s of a particular defense. The playside guard uses the scoop technique. He scoop steps with
. tt ck the wea nes kl a 45 degree angle to the guard-tackle gap and reads the near foot
more opportumty to a a. II better if the defensive tac e
The give to the dive back IS genera Y 't h is better if he is playing of the defensive tackle. If the tackle steps at him, he puts his head
is outside conscious, and the keep or pi c across his numbers and gets his tail turned upfield and scoop
tougher to the inside.
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEEl\ 73
TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEEl\
72
blocks him. If the defensive tackle doesn't slant inside, he simply
goes out and blocks the lineb~ck:~. defensive tackle and gives if
The quarterback. now rea s s i; he slants inside. The give is
he plays to the outs~de or ke~~le laying outside because the
generally good ag~mst a ta . !tside after keying the scoop
playside linebacker IS .often fiymg ft spot as long as your center
block ofthe guard. ThIs creates a so d (Diagram 4-4).
can get a good piece of the noseg uar
S
Diagram 4-5

~~~do~r
c 44 Yeer-8 Scoop vs. O l~ie Slant

One more factor may be considered at this time. A missed

read by the quarterback on a give against a slant tackle can
develop into a big play. The dive back has broken loose for some
big gains by cutting off from the guard's block on the slant tackle.
This is an added bonus in the veer offense because even the
mistakes can work out if the line is effectively scoop blocking the
Diagram 4-4 defense. For this reason the quarterback's rule on the veer is
44 Yeer-8 Scoop vs. Ol~ie Read always, "When in doubt, give to the dive back:'

get to the pitch against a slant tackle the doo-dad block and the inside veer
. .d you have a chance for a
If the defensive tackle slan~ I~SI ~d now be able to hook the Against the great noseguard we still prefer to use the double
big play on the pitch. The guar ~ oU block on the linebacker team with a 4 call. To do this and still eliminate the threat of the
tackle and the tackle has a grea an gle tackle penetrating and hitting the mesh requires a doo-dad block.
(Diagram 4-~). . b k d noseguard are also sealed off with The tackle's rules on the inside veer are identical to the tight end's
The offsIde Ime ac er an d . enerally going in the same rules on a doo-dad block on the outside veer. He base blocks the
scoop blocking since the ~~se~~:n:~e~ your quarterback can get offensive tackle for one count and then releases inside and blocks
direction as the slant tac e: defensive end, you have the the linebacker. The linebacker's rules are generally to step up and
the ball cleanly ~ut to op~\On Ithe The veer release block on the plug against a double team because of the traps and isolations.
potential of breakmg the. bIg Pk:y~r break the play. The other key This makes him vulnerable to a seal block by the offensive tackle.
corner or strong ~afety ~11~f~: feels the quarterback pull the ball, The defensive tackle almost invariably closes and takes the dive,
block is by the dIVe bac . bl cker He checks tackle, to and the quarterback is again out to the end with an excellent seal
he must immediately become a ~ th~ outside and blocks the on the inside pursuit (Diagram 4-6).
linebacker, to free safety as he ve;r:n~ tackle have done their job, If the defensive tackle slants inside, the offensive tackle will
unblocked defender. If your gafuar d that can put 6 points on the lock up and drive him hard down to the inside. This will be a give
he will get a shot at the free s ety an read at first, since the linebacker behind slant tackle will generally
board.
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER 75
74
This is a 44 call whenever we are double teaming a linebacker.
Most teams assign the defensive tackle to take the dive back. If he
c does, and we can block the linebacker, then a big play is again
possible on the keep or pitch. One of the primary keys to the
explosiveness of any kind of option or veer attack is getting to the
linebacker. We believe that whenever we can effectively block the
linebackers. we are going to move the football.
One other very effective blocking scheme against the Okie
defense is to use an 11 call. The tackle now blocks down on the
linebacker and the guard pulls around and seals the linebacker to
Diagram 4-6 the inside (Diagram 4-8).
44 Veer-4 Call-Doo-Dod [3locl~
s
t ps u and takes the dive. then the
overrun the dive back. If he~. e ' ppull the ball and go out and
d
quarterback sho~ld extden~h IS n s~it will again be sealed and you
option the defensIve en. e pur
should have a good play.

the 44 call or 11 call to seal the linebacker

. h I you may prefer to let the
If the linebacker is stOPPlOg t e p aY'd d ble team the line-
h guard alone an ou
. center hand Ie t e n.ose is la ing outside, your tackle can
backer. If the defenslv~ t~~kle fhe linebacker. If the defensive
Y
doo-dad and release. IOSI e. :acker is loose and flowing fast to
tackle is head up, or Ilf th.e ~n -dad release outside and block the
the outside. your tack e WI ll 00 ,
linebacker (Diagram 4-7).
Diagram 4-8
44 Veer-11 Ca ll vs. O l~ie 52 Defense
When the tackle releases inside he generally brings the
defensive tackle down with him and he will almost always take the
dive back. The guard should be able to screen off the linebacker
and the keep or pitch is again wide open. If the tackle pinches
inside, he should block him and take him down hard. When the
quarterback reads this, he will give to the dive back because the
guard will kick out the linebacker and there should be daylight for
good yardage. Many teams now use the 11 call as their basic
blocking scheme against the Okie defense.

blocking the veer against pro 43 defense

In blocking the pro 43 defense, we use either an 8 or a 4 call.
Diagram 4-7
On the 4 call. our tackle combo blocks down to the inside on the
44 Veer-44 Call vs. Ol~ie 52 Defense
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEE[>, 77
TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEE[>,
76
. r backer but must make sure he Another way to stop a middle linebacker and defensive tackle
defensive tackle and mIddle .m~ the ~ide pro 43 defense, we from flowing too fast is to run the 44-45 cut·back. The dive back
gets to the linebacker. ~g~msne of our best plays because there takes two steps toward the 4 or 5 hole, but then cuts back up the
generally use an 8 call. Thlds Ifs a forcing a Quick double read middle. The line uses an 8 or a 1 call against a pro defense
is no possibility of the e ense (Diagram 4-10). This play has also been effective against an Okie
(Diagram 4-9). defense with an 8 call or a double 2 call, and the back simply cuts
off from the center's block. This helps to slow down pursuit, which
s is critical when you run the veer offense.
c
the inside veer will beat the split defense
The other defense that the inside veer has been very effective
against is the split 4 or split 6, particularly if the opponent tries to
stunt the inside linebackers. The center and offside guard and
tackle scoop block the middle, and the playside tackle and guard
block the defensive tackle and playside linebacker (Diagram 4-11).
Diagram 4-9
45 Veer-8 Call vs. Wide Pro 43 c
t handle the defensive tackle, the
If the offensive guard ~a~ndo the d'lve for good yardage. An
. t' break mSI e o n · d
play WIll some Imes that the tackle can block down an
11 call could also be use~ s~nsive tackle. The guard then pulls
have the angle on the he r b cker The key block is the center
around and kicks out on t e I~~ a a~ have to take him past the
on the middle linebacker, a~ e m
hole if you are getting the dIve read. Diagram 4-11
45 Veer-8 Ca ll vs. Split 4 Defense

c
The tight end veer releases and blocks force (outside line·
backer, corner, or free safety). Generally the defensive end has the
quarterback and the outside linebacker takes the pitch if the tight
end veer releases. The quarterback then keys the outside line·
backer and the give is usually wide open to the dive back. This play
can almost force a team out of a split defense and will definitely
stop them from stunting. If the safety is in the middle we run it
toward the flanker. If he is shifted over on the tight end, we run it
Diagram 4-10 away from the flanker.
44 Cut-[3acl~-1 Call
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER 79
TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER
78
pulls around the tackle's block and .
4-12). If the tackle doesn't slant the gets th~ hnebacker (Diagram
ploys which complement the veer on the linebacker after his dr~ st~ua~~sI7plY goes straight out
The other plays which complement the inside veer are the read pass when this happens a~d th~' ~ mebackers generally
44-45 dive and the 44-45 option. The dive is simply a predeter- (Diagram 4-13). Both tight ends sta IS .ma es for an easier block
mined hand off, and it is used in short yardage situations or when end. The offside tackle tries y ,.n and block the defensive
you know that your tackle can simply whip their tackle. If this is is slanting hard he will just ~~v~u~ ~ff ~IS de~en~ive tackle, but if he
the case, you want to stay as basic as possible and take what you break outside him. 1m own mSlde and the play will
know is yours. On a 44-45 dive the quarterback will hand off to the
dive back as deep as possible so that he has time to cut to s
daylight. The 44 dive will often break in the 2 or the 6 hole and the
back must read the block of your tackle and break accordingly. c c
s "I
v...
1
EI

making two ploys into one-the dive and cut-bock 00

The 44-45 dive and cut-back can also be incorporated to-
gether by using 8 read blocking. This play has been particularly
4
effective against the Okie slant defense. The dive back hits at the
or 5 hole and the quarterback gets him the ball as deep as Diagram 4-13
possible. He then reads the defensive tackle. If the tackle slants 44 Dive-8 f\eod-Cut-[lacll on Key
down inside, he accelerates straight ahead and cuts outside off the
tackle's block (Diagram 4-12). If the tackle is reading or looping The 8 read variation of the 44-45 dive has hid k .
outside, the back cuts at a sharp 45 degree angle and breaks it much more consistent la Th b I . . e pe to rna e It a
behind the noseguard (Diagram 4-13). the soft spot of the defe~s:~nd ~h al~ carner IS now always hitting
the wa the . . e me can always take their men
s the tactle o~ :~: gom~. Agamst an even defense, the back reads
~ack will always C~~ai~s~:~~~~~:s:~~ i~ is L~st 18 call. bl~cking. The
Just breaks for daylight Th e ac e s ants mSlde; then he
. e center and plays'd d
bl ock the tackle and middle linebacker. I e guar scoop

blocking the tackle on a 44-45 option

blockOn
thethe optio n, we fa k~ a 44 or 45 dive and base-rule
44-45 W
defense
get the pitch and ~Is~ t~;~pc~1 t.hl~t~¥ ifb are sure that we can
Diagram 4-12 we
44 Dive-8 f\eod-Guord Pulis Around DT a play if the can . . e I.nsl e me ackers. We do not have
or the pitch \he get tanffmSI?e hnebacker out on the quarterback
h . mos e echve way for us t th 44
The tackle blocks the man on and takes him the way he is as been to pull th t kl f 0 run e -45 option
going. The guard drop steps with his outside foot and reads the end. This is a 22 c:lla(c . eon or ce and block down with the tight
Dmgram 4 -14). .
near foot of the defensive tackle. If he is slanting inside, the guard
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER 61
TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER
60
Chapter 9. But the other way is to teach t
the veer release and stalk block. he proper techniques on
c
the execution of the veer release block
The veer release block is b th .
responsible for secondary y e tight end on whomever is
corner. On the side of the fl ru~ support-usually a safety or a
which is called "sky" Awa fan erhyou usually get safety support
. y rom t e flanker y II '
support, which is called "clo ud" (D'lagram 4-15).
ou usua y get corner
Diagram 4-14
44 Option-22 Call
ISKYI ICLOUDI
c
This play has complemented our offense because, when the

l~o 00o
c
tight end and safety see the tight end block down, they read
outside veer. The tackle then has time to get outside leverage for 00~1
the force block on the safety and the pitch often breaks for good
yardage. This is also excellent against a split 4 or split 6 defense.
The tight end blocks the man head up against a split 4 and blocks Diagram 4-15
the first man inside against a split 6. Veer Releose [3 l ocl~ VS. S l~y and Cloud

for three steps and keys the f t re ~ase, he pulls. to his outside
As the tight end starts his veer I
three key factors in executing a successful
blocks him. If the safety is dro s~ e Yb :he safety IS coming, he
veer offense on the flanker side in cloud ppmg ac to deep third, as he does
The blocking schemes are obviously a critical part of any and attacks the corner. If theC~~;:~ge: t~en he simply flattens out
offense, but there are three other critical phases that must be corner and the safety must fi t t se IS 10 man coverage, both the
properly executed if a veer offense is going to be successful: 1) the the easiest kind of seconda rs re reat and cover the pass. This is
veer release block; 2) the stalk block; and 3) the pitch relationship. almost impossible for a tea ry ~overage to block for the pitch. It is
The remainder of this chapter will deal with these three phases, against a good veer offe: 0 ~onsistently stay in man coverage
support. e ecause of the weak secondary
and this may be the most important part of the entire book. The
timing and coordination of these three factors are what make the The most important coachin .
veer a big play offense. You must first be able to comprehensively tell the tight end to "g t 'd h g pomt on the veer release is to
understand and teach each technique and then drill, drill, and drill take his three lateral s~e WI t ,not depth." That means he must
some more. Constant repetition in practice is the only way to get the line of scrimmage Th s :nd act~all~ belly back 1 yard behind
upfield too soon and ~ry t~ ::Pt:tI~n IS for the tight end to turn
the job
As done.
was stated earlier, one way in which the defenses have this (gets depth) he is e' ac t e force man. When he does
limited the effectiveness of the veer is with great secondary llnd he is forced 'to throgw ~hmgbtlookfar out in front of the pitch back
3 e m t
os e ective open field block' hsoon . Eve ryone k nows that
ff e oc too
support against the pitch. Teams have done this with quick keys th
and by selling out to stop the run. One way to counteract this Is to 5 yards ahead of the b II I~ W en the block is thrown just
a carn,er. This is the great blocking
with a great passing attack. This aspect will be discussed in

TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEE!'.
62
relationship that exists in the wishbone offense and is a key reason
for its effectiveness. The same thing applies to the veer release
block. The tight end wants to pull wide, keep outside leverage on
the force man, string him out, and make the block near the line of
scrimmage. The block should be made about 2 or 3 yards from the
line of scrimmage and never more than 5 yards downfield unless
the back calls "go, go," which means he has the pitch and is
running up on the tight end. This "go, go" call should always be
made, as in a screen pass, so that the blocker knows when to
throw on the defender. This is also true for the stalk block by the
wideIn receiver.
the block on the safety or corner, the tight end should aim
for his opponent's numbers, run over him, and keep his feet at all
times. The back can then cut inside or outside of the block and you
are assured of getting good wood on him. The only exception
occurs when the force man tries to crack hard and quick inside his
veer release block. When this happens the tight end can throw
hard, cut him, and roll three times to be sure he ties him up. We
also let him throw sometimes on a corner coming hard in cloud
coverage on the flanker'S side, but this may not even be necessary.
The key points for the veer release block are as follows: Take
three lateral steps and belly back 1 yard; read secondary for sky or
cloud coverage; wait and block the force man near the line of
scrimmage so that the ball carrier is no more than 5 yards away
when you hit him; keep your feet and run over him. This is a
relatively easy block if the tight end will abide by these rules. We
have had some small tight ends who were great veer release
blockers simply because they were disciplined and took great pride
in the proper execution of the block.
blocking the secondary with the stalk block
The stalk block is the block by the playside wide receiver and
is used on all options or veers. The first coaching point is the one
that is the most difficult to sell and yet may be the most important
part of the block. The wide receiver must come off the line
smoking. He has to start on a "fly" pattern and explode off the line
just as if he were running a deep pass route. If it is cloud coverage,
the corner will try to bump him hard to the inside. He must never
let this happen. He should come off the bump to the outside and
TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEE!'. 63
continue to run a fly pattern down th . .
safety to sprint hard and dee f th e sldelme. This will force the
his pass responsibility in c1o~d or e outside third because this is
down as the safety reads run an~o~era~e'dThe flanker then breaks
stalk block. rea s own, and he will use his
If the corner retreats the .d .
that it is either sky or ma~ co WI e rec~lver knows immediately
in the same way He cont' vetrage, an he will block them both
. mues 0 sprint h d h'
keys the corner When the c d ar on IS fly route and
must break do~n before he ;~ner re~ s that the play is a run, he
wide receiver must break d n re~c ~p. As .he breaks down, the
critical coaching point. St own ~n mlTror him. This is the other
shuffles back toward the' II'noP fW ~n he stops! The wide receiver
. e 0 scnmmage th
1m to attack the ball carrier Th b as e corner comes at
as possible. Just as before th~ I e I~ck. should be thrown as late
h
he throws, the easier the 'bloc~. oser e IS to the ball carrier when
The block itself is merely a "m'" .
g~ts c1o~e, the wide receiver should ~~~r block.. As the opponent
him, gomg where he goes He Sh td' pound hiS feet and mirror
face up, and aim at hl's' b ou H Just screen him if he comes
num ers. e sh Id
unless he sees the corner commit t 0 ~u not Ieave his feet
corner tries to get past him h h ~n~ Side or the other. If the
times and wrap him up If h ' t e s ou d Just throw and roll three
stick with him and let the be skays fa~e up, the receiver should just
him head up if he hears th:?' cut 0" his block. He should attack
This is not a difficult block ~rt~~ ~all from. the running back.
schooled and have enou h ride' w~de receivers are properly
a selling job. Be dema~di~9' y: 10 th~l;r ~Iocking. Part of it is just
spring more big plays than a~ ~~n WI find that this block can
can effectively block the I .dyt g else you do. Whenever you
carrier near the blocks p t~SI ~ corn.er and safety and get the ball
running room. ,ere IS go 109 to be a lot of grass for
the quarterback read for the inside veer
The third key factor in executin th . .
proper read and pitch t h' g e mSlde veer involves the
I~g points for the read ae~d ~~~~sbby the quarterback. The coach-
dive back are identical to those f e~ween t~e quarterback and the
mesh now takes place t th or t e outside veer except that the
a e guard-tackle gap. The dive back
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEER 65
64
possible
pitch backfor do
a quick defensive
not have a e nd to. d 0 thiS
. If
. the quarterback and
again uses a soft squeeze on the ball. The quarterback first reads
the tackle for the give or keep and then proceeds to option the this possibility the quarter~:~ter Plt~hl relationship. To eliminate
defensive end. A primary difference between the outside veer and and give the pitch back th h mus s ow play the slow-play end
the inside veer is the number of times you will get the pitch. The turn upfield. In other word: ~hanc.~ t~ get around the corner and
outside veer will be a give or keep read more than 90 percent of the the line of scrimmage with the bea~~ c k~ust be ~Imost parallel to
time, and the pitch back will get the ball less than 10 percent of the out in front ofthe quarterback (D. ta I~g the pitch about 5 yards
time. The inside veer is just the opposite and the pitch back will get too often the quarterback gets to ~~gr;~ -~6). The problem is that
the ball most of the time; therefore, it is much more critical to back is able to get the e e enslve end before the pitch
work on the correct pitch relationship for the inside veer. happens, he slow plays th:r:~;rb P~~h r~lationship. When this
feet, and turning his shoulders y eakmg d~wn, pounding his
While he does this (it only t k squ:re to the Ime of scrimmage.
beating the fire stunt by a defensive end has time to get 5 yards out i~ f~~n~ ou~ athe second) they pitch back
longer take both the quarterba k ,adn h .slow-pla end can no
o c an t e pitch
As the quarterback proceeds to option the end, there are
basically three types of defensive end play he must be ready to
attack. The first thing he must recognize is the fire stunt-a hard
to dip inside as they get c\os t 0 th r
ne other technique used effectivel b .
y some quarterbacks is
him commit to take the quart: b k e s ow-play end. This makes
crashing end. This means that as he reads the tackle he must also then steps back out and Pitch:S:~ ~nl:he keep. ~he quarterback
be able to key the end, and if both come hard he should pitch the same-a viable play. e a and the final result is the
ball as quickly as possible. This is the most difficult read a
quarterback has in learning the veer offense and constant repeti-
tion in practice is the only way he can beat it. If your team gets the c
pitch it should be a big play because you get around the perimeter c s
so quickly. A note of caution should be made at this point. If the
quarterback didn't read the fire stunt soon enough he should give
to the dive back or keep it himself and get what he can. He should
never pitch the ball unless he is certain that he can get it away
safely. If a team is constantly firing their ends it is better to call
EXCELLENT
fewer inside veers and run more options instead, especially the
lead option. This eliminates the double read. The quarterback can POOR
key the defensive end immediately and should have no problem in
Diagra m 4-16
getting the pitch off. Proper Pitch Relationship vs. Slow-Play End

attacking the slow-play end optioning against a boxing defensive end

The second type of defensive end play that the quarterback
must be able to attack is the "slow-play" or "wait-and-skate" end.
This is the most common type of end play against most option
teams. The slow-play end always waits on the line of scrimmage,
keeps his outside foot back, makes the quarterback pitch the ball,
and then sprints down the line and catches the pitch back. It is
The third type of defensive e d I .
effective as the fire 0 th I n p ay IS generally not as
quarterback wh h res ow pl~y, but it can cause problems for a
box their ends a~ro as neve.r practiced against it. Some teams try to
but then slap at th:s~hl~ h~e a~d .tak~ the quarterback all the way,
a w en It IS pitched. An athlete with quick
 TEACHING THE EXECUTION OF THE INSIDE VEEl\
86
hands can become quite proficient at this and the resulting
fumbles can be disastrous. Against the "boxing" end. the quarter-
back must first fake the pitch and then quickly cut up inside on the
keep. This type of defensive end is generally vulnerable against the
keep if he has come across the line 2 yards or more. If he has not
penetrated for at least 2 yards. the quarterback can dip inside and
then come out and pitch the ball. This type of end can never help
on the pitch because he must be facing the quarterback to slap at
the ball. He is therefore taking the quarterback all the way and the
pitch should be a good play.

the veer continues to evolve Breaking Long Runs with the

A final summary may help to review the essential coaching
points on the inside veer. First. the quarterback must learn to
Counter and Counter Option
execute the double read and get the proper mesh with the dive
back. Second. the blocking scheme must somehow tie up the
inside linebacker so that he cannot take the quarterback or pitch.
Third. the stalk block and veer release block must be properly
executed so that secondary force is eliminated. Finally. the proper
primary concern for every offensive e enslve o?t~all has become a
pitch relationship must be established against the different types The pursuit factor in modern d f . f .
of defensive end play. The inside veer continues to be an excellent for the coach who is runn. th coach. ThiS IS particularly true
which teams can stop the i~~~e v veer o~ense. The only way in
play for those teams who have been able to make the proper e
adaptations to the defensive innovations that were designed to is by turning the defensive tea I eer. outSide veer and lead option
stop the play. As is true for any play in football. it must either pursue from sideline to sideli: ~~e an~ getting all 11 players to
evolve or die. The inside veer is sti1l evolving and is very much alive depend on quickness for their· ese tree basic veer plays all
everyone on the field knows in ;~~~~ss: an~ after the first step
as it continues to add an important dimension to the total veer
offense. Defensive pursuit and quickne directIOn the ball is going.
offense. Because of this . ss are a must for containing the
pnmary emphasis on def .
e counter action plays hav
th The counter option is e~er:fome b enslve pursuit.
more and more effective.
veer offense. For thre g Iy the most explosive play in the
.th h e years we averaged over 9 d
WI t is play. which accounted for n I . yar s per carry
as any other play in our offens T~ar y tWice as many long runs
most consistent inside r . e. e counter play has been the
plays is identical and thUennmg pl.ay. The backfield action for both
veer offense Why is thO y ~onshtute the best series in the entire
. IS senes so explosiv ? Wh t
present effectiveness? This ch . e. a accounts for its
tions and outline th·. apter Will try to answer these ques-
e pnmary coaching points.
87
 THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION 89
88
s
the double dive counter
We actually have three types of counter plays which hit up the
middle. The 44.45 cut·back was explained in the preceding
chapter and has been particularly effective against even defenses.
Another play we use is the 24·25 counter. This play can be very
effective against a team that flows quickly on the initial action of
the quarterback. The quarterback opens up for one step and fakes
to the dive back away from the hole. He then reverse pivots and
Diagram 5·2
hands off to the ball carrier behind the playside guard. The ball
24 Counter Option- 8 Ca ll vs, Pro Defense
should be given deep enough so that the back can cut for daylight.
The ball carrier takes a quick counter step to the offside and then
dropped from the play because "co~ e w?r~, coun~~r was
dives at the playside guard and cuts off his block (Diagram 5·1). our basic counter and counter 0 Ption Th .. "
The tackle can use an 8, 3 or 1 call against the pro defense, and an option" were considered too wo rdy nter ~Ive and counter
8 or 2 call against an odd defense. The blocking schemes for all the 22.23 dive or 22.23 oPtion. . We now sImply call this series
three counter plays are identical, so only the 22·23 counter dive
will be drawn against a variety of defenses.
a consistent inside attack with the 22-23 dive
s s
c The 22·23 dive has been the best d ..
c play in the entire offense It is an t ani most consIstent mside
and that may account fo~ the h. ~~ reme y simple play to execute
back dives directly at the tail ~fth egree of success. The playside
The ~uarterback reverse pivots and hc:~!:rh~ndt~utbs °lffl his block.
e
possIble. The quarterback . 1m e a as deep as
·'8 CALL"
"3 CALL" that he doesn't crowd the ~ust . be ~ertam to go straight back so
able to go straight for the tairn~~~g ack. The dive back must be
pitch route and he and th 0 e ~enter. The offside back runs a
Diagram 5-1 option after the handoff ~h~uar~er ack continue to fake a 22·23
24 Counter-3 Call vs, Pro Defense the quarterback becaus~ th IS s. ould be emphasized strongly to
watch the ball carrier after t~~e IS a stron~ tendency to stop and
Many veer teams use this same action for their counter option call with fold blocks b hS h~dndoff (DIagram 5·3). A double 2
and have experienced excellent success. The only difference is that
h on ot Sl es has be
sc erne against the Okie or 53 def ~n a great blocking
the offside back takes a jab step straight ahead with his outside release and block the f ense. The tight ends can always
foot and then swings to playside for the ptich. The quarterback play will always break ~e~r sa et y on any fold block because the
then fakes to the counter back and options the defensive end
a 8 e ween t h e tackles
ur call has also been u d t . .
(Diagram 5.2). We have run this play with a limited amount of effective if the play breaks ba kS~ ~ tImes and is particularly
happens quite oft c ehmd the offside tackle. This
success but it is not a part of our basic offense. Our offensive line
was relatively small and the counter steps slowed the play down In and block the ;ni an.d therefore the offside tight end must stay
too much. Our offensive line had trouble holding their blocks, so the play breaks b::~~I~~ e~d on all 8 calls (Diagram 5·4). When
"'D .1;~r"rded the play and instead ran the 22·23 dive and option as
IS ar to the offside, it serves the same
 THE COUNTEII AND COUNTEII OPTION THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION 91
90
s
s
c
c

Diagram 5-5
Diagram 5-3 22 Dive-1 Call vs. Pro 43 Defense
. D ble 2 Call vs. Ol,ie 52 Defense
23 Dive- au

s A note of caution: The tackles must be aware that they can

s never use a double 1 call, because it is obvious that the center
c cannot fold block with both guards on the same play. This has also

1
been an excellent blocking scheme for the 44 cut-back.

the problem encountered with the split defense

Blocking the split defense causes some additional problems
for the counter plays. The split 4 or split 6 defenses have four
Diagram 5-4 defenders aligned on the two guards and center and the offense is
23 Dive-8 Call vs. Ol,ie 52 Defense outnumbered up the middle. Many split defensive teams also run
the middle stunts and attack the four gaps between the tackles. It
I s to slow down defensive pursuit. The is very difficult to run any kind of dive or trap play up the middle
purpose as a reverse and he ~ the opening as it breaks in the against the stunts. Basically, there are three rules for our tackles
back must be able to ~ut . ~~ 8 call may hit in the 3 hole ~r to follow in selecting the proper blocking scheme, and intelligent
defensive line. The 23 dl~e w~ 2a~ or 6 hole. The offensive line IS guessing becomes important here. If the tackle expects the
break behind the center to t e , t to go and the back will defense to stunt (according to scouting reports or a short yardage
told to take their men t~~ W~y ~~y ;~e important thing for the situation), he should call "88" and wedge block it (Diagram 5-6).
read the daylight a~dhfi~ .t ~lo~k:' and maintain contact. We will now have a two-man apex at the hole, and the other
linemen is to stay WIt elr lineman will reach block to the playside gap. We also use an 88
call against a true gap 8 or 65 goal line defense. A 2 call on the
blocking the dive ogainst an even defense Offside is good if the tackles are fairly sure the defense will not
kle call will be either an 8 or a stunt (Diagram 5-7).
Against an even defense, th.e tac in break at almost any place If the tackles do not really know what to expect-straight or
1 call. On the 8 call, the play wIll ~g;id a ainst the Okie defense. stunt-we tell them both to use 8 calls. The guards always block
along the line of scrimmar' ~sb I~ n ;he guard and center and out on the defensive tackles on an 8 call. The center's rule is, "Step
The 1 call would be a fold bboC h e ';:~de tackle (Diagram 5-5). to playside, but block away." This means that the center steps to
it should usually be called y teo
92 THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION
THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION
93

c s c
c
8

o
8 E

" 88 CALL"

Diagram 5-6
23 Dive -88 Call vs. Split 6 Stunt
Diagram 5-8
23 Dive-8 Call vs. Split 4 Defense

.~
use a 1 and 2 call against a gap-stack defense
The other defense that th t kl
stack" defense. You should al:a:~ ue:e
great angle blocks on any counter
mut rel~ogniZe is a "gap.
a ca and a 2 call for
"8 CALL" know that the play will always b plka~, anhd the ball carrier must
rea In t e open h I (D·
5-9). This is a super play against th d ~ 0 e lagram
should be able to audible to it at a~y ~~:~e and the quarterback
Diagram 5-7
22 Dive-2 Call vs. Split 4 Defense s
c
the playside gap and blocks either the linebacker or the tackle if

6~t~'
they stunt into the playside gap. He can read this on his first step. If
no stunt develops, he turns back and blocks the offside linebacker E
(Diagram 5-8). This is a good blocking scheme because if they
stunt the linebackers in the guard-center gaps, our guards and
center have great angle blocks. We turn the offside linebacker free Q ---=-
"1 CALL"
"ZCAll"
but he generally runs by the ball carrier because he penetrates too
hard in the offside gap. He may hit the quarterback, but this
always occurs after the handoff, and the play really breaks clean
when this happens. The key block is by the playside tackle Diagram 5-9
whenever the defense doesn't stunt. His assignment is to get to the 22 Dive-1 and 2 Call vs. Gop-Stocl\ Defense
legs of the playside linebacker and cut him if possible. This is often
not a difficult block because the linebacker steps to playside with
the flow of the play, knowing he must be able to help stop the executing the 22-20 counter option
counter option. The center and guards again have good angles and The 22·23 opt· . th
the play should break up the middle. The quarterback ~o~ IS e chomp~ementary play to the 22·23 dive.
a es to t e dIVe back and then options the
94 THE COUNTEII AND COUNTEII OPTION
defensive end for the keep or pitch. The only difference is that the
dive back now hits the playside gap instead of aiming at the tail of
the center. This gives the quarterback a little more operating room
and lets him get out quicker on the defensive end. He should also
try to stay as close to the line of scrimmage as possible (Diagram
5-10).
The dive back should either get tackled or fight through and
get out on the free safety. He usually has a better chance than the
offside tackle has of getting to the free safety, and this block can
mean the difference between a good gain and a touchdown. That
kind of extra effort on the part of each player is what often
distinguishes an average team from a great team. For the dive
back to simply carry out a good fake is not enough. You should
demand the great second effort and play those athletes who are
willing to demand it of themselves.
THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION
95
easy blocks by the offensive line (D'
by the quarterback, and the fact th~:~~:m 5-10).. The reverse pivot
to the offside, forces the linebackers to 22-23 dIVe usually breaks
center and the guards. If they don't h step uP. and take on the
best play in your offense. Th f k ,t e 22-23 d~ve should be the
the linebackers in this way. eW~e: ~~: 44-45 option doesn't tie up
the dive back hits the 4 or 5 h I h qu~rterback opens up and
along the line immediately ~ e, t e Imebackers start Sliding
(Diagram 5.11). an are much tougher to block
s
c

a good pitch relationship is essential

iEi--..-,
, ,,

The pitch back must again sprint hard to get out in front of
the quarterback by 5 yards and turn upfield. This is fairly easy to Diagram 5.10
do on the counter option because he doesn't take any counter step 22 Option- B Call vs. O/Iie 52 Defense
and, as the quarterback reverse pivots, he has time to get well out
in front of him. Because of this it is impossible for a slow·play end
to take both the quarterback and the pitch. Even a slower back
can maintain a good pitch relationship on the 22-23 option. It
must be emphasized once more that the proper pitch relationship
is the single most important factor in the success of any option
play. The only way that the players will learn to consistently
establish that relationship is through constant repetition in prac·
tice. Run the playa thousand times with just the backs. Drill and
drill some more. Demand perfection whenever you are working on
the pitch.
Diagram 5.11
the key is slowing down pursuit 44 Option-B Call VS. O/Iie 52 Defense

The blocking on the counter option is generally an 8 call by This basic difference was d
the line with the tight end using his veer release rule. As on aU vear we ran the veer offense. A~:h e vei clear to us during the first
options, a primary key to the success of t he play will be the Our statistics on each play Th 2~ ~~ of t.he season we compiled
proficiency with which you tie up the inside linebackers. The main per carry as opposed to 1 3' e . optIOn averaged 8.7 yards
reason for this play's success is that the dive fake to the inside has ~hocked all of us becaus~ t~a~~s f~~ the 44-45 option. This really
" natural tendency to freeze the linebackers a nd it sets them up for lid been identical Aft e .oc mg schemes for the two plays
. er we revIewed all of our films, the reasons
96 THE COUNTEJ1. AND COUNTEJ1. OPTION
THE COUNTEJ1. AND COUNTEJ1. OPTION
97
for the difference became apparent. On the 22-23 option, we were
nearly always able to tie up the linebackers and noseguard, and linebacker. This scheme has b
flow hard to the outside with t~e~ ~.xc~lent against teams who
the pitch relationship was a natural in defeating the slow·play end. elr
great angle block on the Iineba k (IDn: ackers, for it provides a
Because of this, we drastically cut down our dependence on the c er lagram 5.12).
44·45 option and instead worked much harder at perfecting the
ISKY /
22·23 option. This has really paid big dividends in increasing the
explosiveness of our offense.
s
B (. C
never give a lineman an impossible block
One other very important coaching point should be empha·
V6
sized when teaching the counter option. We tell our plays ide tackle
that we want him to block the defensive tackle to the inside if it is
at all possible. This generally is not a difficult block because of the
good inside fake by the dive back, but once in a while the defensive
Diagram 5. 12
tackle is outside conscious and can't be blocked in. When this
23 G Option-G Call vs. O/Iie Defense
happens, the tackle should simply maintain contact and drive him
out as far as possible. Several long runs by the quarterback have
broken inside the tackle's block when this has happened. It is The guard should get a ard d .
defensive end and then turn y , epth pulhng around the
always important to take what the defense gives you, and you h d h up on IOrce He should· t h
never want to give a lineman an impossible block. ea on t e numbers and let the ·t h b ·k JUS put is
defensive end comes across and PI ~ . ac cut off his block. If the
Another way to handle a defensive tackle who is outside him. The quarterback then ct · ge .s I? his way, he should block
conscious is to use a 22 call and pull the tackle on force. The tight S
runs may also result The k u h up .mslde his block. Several long
end blocks down on the defensive tackle and should be able to .
Agamst . ey ere IS to take what th .
a pro 43 defense we ·11 ey gIve you.
block him to the inside. This also helps confuse defensive keys the tight end. The coach in ' . WI use. an 8 call and veer release
because many defensive teams key the blocks of the tight end for for the 22.23 G option 0 g rhou~s re~am almost identical except
their option responsibilities. Quite often, a team will have the end tight end block down ~n ~h ~ OPtion, the playside tackle and
take the quarterback if the offensive tight end blocks down, and erst man to their inside (Diagram
take the pitch if he veer releases. When we use a 22 call, we know
that the opponent using this scheme will always take the quarter·
back on the option and it makes our reads and execution that
much easier. C
I CLOUDI
C

pulling the guard to block secondary force

.L
One other blocking scheme has also been used effectivelv
against an Okie defense. When we pull our onside guard on force,
we use a G call. This play is called 22·23 G option in the huddle.
Our tackle will still block the defensive tackle against an Ok"
defense but the tight end will release inside and block the Diagram 5.13
22 G Option- G Coli VS. Pro 43 Defense
98 THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION
THE COUNTER AND COUNTER OPTION
99
5-13). The guard still pulls and blocks force. and he must be able to
recognize sky or cloud coverage and block accordingly.

variations in blocking split defenses

Blocking the 22-23 option against a split defense entails very
few changes. On an 8 call. the playside guard and tackle are again SCOOP BLOCK
responsible for the defensive tackle and inside linebacker; the
center and offside lineman scoop block (Diagram 5-14). The only
exception involves the tight end. He blocks the linebacker head uP. Diagram 5-15
instead of veer releasing. His rule on all options is to never veer 22 Option-55 Coli vs. Split 6 Defense
release if he has a man head up and another man outside him on
the line of scrimmage. He simply blocks the man who is head up. force. This becomes a critical block a . .
This rule is necessary because. if he does veer release. the offense have elected to go with man Covera ga.mst a spltt defense if they
does not have a play-one of the defenders will take quarterback free safety is over on the tight d (Dg~ m the secondary and the
and the other will take the pitch and the offense will be in real en lagram 5-16).
trouble. Teams with the split defense caused several fumbled c

'JJ(J~
pitches before we implemented this rule.

s
c
B
.~ ';~IC
SCOOP BLOCK ZZ CALL "

Diagram 5-14
23 Option-5 Coli vs. Split 4 Defense
Blocking the split 6 defense requires an 88 call by the tackle.
Blocking the split 6 for the options is therefore not different from
blocking the outside veer or lead option. The guard and tackle rule
is the same as for a split 4 defense. but the tight end here must
block down on the man on your tackle. This is the same rule for
him as on all outside plays against a split 6 defense and Is
therefore not difficult to remember (Diagram 5-15).
Possibly a better blocking scheme against a split 6 or a split 4
defense is a 22 call. The playside tackle is able to pull and block
Diagram 5-16
22 Option-22 Coil vs. Split 6 Defense
The inside fake is counted h
enough for the center to et a i on to . old the linebacker long
stunt the middle Iinebac:er th ece of hIm. If the defense elects to
block will pick up the stunt =~d t':!' ar~ r~al~ in trouble. The scoop
good blocks on both th e PI c s ould be a big play with
against a split 4 defense t~eC~r~~r a;d. the safety. On a 22 call
up, and all other assig~m t g en. sImply blocks the man head
Option. the guard pulls 0 ;n s remam the same. On the 22-23 G
defensive tackle. All ot~ orce .and the tackle blocks down on the
III'IIJJJ 5-17). except that th~ t~s~;gnments remain the same (Dia-
against a split 4 d ~ Ig e?d must block the man head up
t
defense. This is a :o~~se nd the first man inside against a split 6
defense when they are i~ ay away from YOu~ flanker against a split
man coverage or m a four-deep rotating
 THE COUNTm AND COUNTm OPTION THE COUNTm AND COUNTm OPTION 101
100
c tie in the run and the pass for continuity
One other important reason for thi I '
frequently pass off 22 -23 p Iay actton.
. spay s success
A ba . tt . is that we
pass to the tight end who' T II SIC pa ern IS the dump
that he takes on his 'veer r~~:~~e y;~~ss a route. identical to the one
for the strong safety to read run 'or a m~kes It .extremely difficult
actor- he must make the two p .s~ ~f.the tight end is a good
possible. In this way the pa . posslblhttes look as similar as
, ssmg game compl
game by slowing up the s d ements the running
Diagra m 5-17 . econ ary run sup t Th
coord mate the running a n d ' por . e more you
23 Option-G Call vs. Split 6 Defense (Middle Stunt) both become. passmg games. the more effective they

zone. In either case. the defense is unbalanced by a 6 to 5 ratio and

there is one less block to worry about away from strength. review of the main coaching points
The blocking schemes against all other defenses are basically
the same. The G block works best against a 53 defense because The major coaching pom
as follows: . t s for teaching the 22-23 options are
the inside fake should freeze the middle linebacker and keep him
from getting out on the pitch. We use an 88 call against a gap 8
the dive back to freeze the e e~we;n th~ q.uarterback and
1. Get a good mesh on the fak b
defense and an 8 call against a 65 goal line. but the outside veer
and lead option are better plays against these short yardage 2. Establish th . pursUit 0 the mSlde linebackers.
e proper pitch relationsh' .
ble to destroy the slow-play end. Ip as qUickly as possi-
defenses.
The key blocks that will largely determine the success of the
~ back and the
22-23 option are the stalk block by the wide receiver and the veer 3. Coordinate the timing between the itch
blocks by the tight end and WI'de receiver
release by the tight end. The coaching points for these blocks were
discussed in detail in the previous chapter and must be empha- ~. Se~ect t~e best blocking scheme against ~ach def
sized again while teaching the counter options. . Dnll, dnll. drill-especially with th f f ' ense.
wide receivers running co nt e o enslve backs and
sive ends and a full S Ud er options against two defen-
econ ary.
a quick-hitting counter option without counter steps
6. Be sure to pass usin th .
dive and option are ~woeo~~~:t~~~~IO~ action .. The 22-23
offense and are an essential art f aSlc pl~ys m the veer
The most unique aspect of this particular counter option is
that none of the backs take counter steps. The dive back hits the 2 fact, we believe that th p 0 the enttre package. In
or 3 hole as quickly as possible and the pitch back sprints most explosive running pfa c~unt~~ option is presently the
immediately for the sidelines in order to quickly establish the an exciting brand of footb~I:~ co ege football. It makes for
proper pitch relationship. The quarterback reverse pivots. fakes to
the dive back. and gets out to option the defensive end as fast as
possible. The advantage of this is that the play hits much faster
than most counter options and the line does not have to hold their
blocks as long. We have found that the fake in the 2 or 3 hole is
sufficient to freeze the pursuit; therefore. the counter stepS are
unnecessary.

6
Coordinating the
Lead Option W ithin the
Veer Offense
Coaches are always looking for plays to incorpor~te into ~?~ir
ff s that will add a new dimension and yet reqUire very If e
o ense. his is basically what the lead option has done or
new learn~g. T The blocking rules for the offensive line are very
t~e ~:~~~ t~~::·in the outside veer. The backfield action is as eas~
:~r:~ecute as any play in the entire off~ns~h~~;~l !~~~:~::~~:n
ears our average yardage per carry or . I b our
~econ: :~~::~~~~~:r~~: ~~~~~~ ~~!~:~:~~~~~:~: ~ee~~:ss to
::~~~t has become an integral part of the total offensive system.
the quarterback action on the lead option
· ·res an initial
The quarterback action on the lead optIOn req~1 Th· does
counter step with the offside foo~ away fr~mf ~~a:i:~~~~ine~:ckers
two things. First, it slows down t e purs~1 ok S nd it gives the
when they attempt to key the quarter ac. eco ,
COORDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEfI OFFENSE 103
pitch back adequate time to sprint out ahead of the quarterback in
order to establish a good pitch relationship. Some coaches prefer
to have the quarterback take one step back and show pass instead
of taking the counter step. But there is a problem with this because
the quarterback is removed from the line of scrimmage. We
therefore try to keep him as close to the line of scrimmage as
possible, because we believe this is more advantageous on any
option play. The pitch relationship also remains more consistent
and it is easier to get upfield more quickly if the read is keep.
blocking force with an arc block
The playside back is the lead blocker and always runs an arc
and blocks force. His rule is identical to the rules for the tight end
on the veer release in reading man, sky or cloud coverage. Against
man or sky, he blocks the safety, and against cloud he blocks the
corner. He sprints toward the sidelines for five steps as he reads the
secondary support, turns upfield, and runs over the defender who
is attacking the pitch back. This is not a difficult block because the
player is always directly ahead of the pitch back by about 3 to 5
yards and the ball carrier can cut quickly off the block (Diagram
6-1).
c
Diagram 6-1
38 Option-44 Co il vs. Ollie 52 Defense
establishing the proper pitch relationship
The pitch back sprints hard to the sidelines and gets turned
upfield to take the pitch about 5 yards out in front of the
 COORDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEf\ OFFENSE 105
coor,DINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEf\ OFFENSE
104
guard's blocking assignment did 't h
quarterback. We try to establish the same pitch relationship as on that the offensive line coach sta~edc e~nge. ~~e only change was
any other veer or option, and the quarterback must be prepared to of this particular block. He told the phaslzmg.the importance
slow play the slow-play end, as explained in Chapter 4. If the critical block on the field . Th'IS may notguard
see that It. was the most
defense elects to fire their defensive ends, this becomes the best was a major factor in improvin the .. m very Important but it
play in the veer offense. The quarterback quickly pitches the ball Before this, the offside line meg h effiCIency of the entire offense.
n w 0 were remov d f h
and the pitch back is around the perimeter of the defense with a never realized how critical thei bl Ck e rom t e play
lead blocker in front of him. A general rule to follow is, the more itsel.f was not really that diffi~ult °t s actually were. The block
the defense fires their ends, the more the offense will run the lead reahzed this. 0 execute once the players

option.
perfecting the scoop and slip blocks
great pursuit can hurt the lead option
One other change was made in th bl . .
The lead option does have one disadvantage when compared secure the blocks on the lineba k ~ ockmg scheme to help
with all other option plays. Great pursuit by the defense can really the defensive lineman and the Ii~ e~rs. k any teams began slanting
limit the effectiveness of the play because there is no dive fake to the slant. This made it difficult f:~ t~rs would scrape off behind
slow down the defense. Because of this, the play is often more blocks. The scoop and slip t h ' e guards to secure their
effective against a big, slow team as opposed to a smaller and counteract the slant. ec mque was then developed to
quicker defense. It also forces the coach to strongly emphasize the The scoop technique referred t th
importance of sealing off the pursuit of all the linebackers. The men with linebackers over them) to. e uncovered linemen (line-
blocking scheme that does this the best is the 44 call, which tells They would key the defensive r s eppmg toward the playside gap.
the tight end to double team down on the first linebacker to the slanted toward them Th' . memlan and scoop block him if he
. IS IS a re ativel bl k
inside. Since this generally gives the tight end an excellent angle (Diagram 6-2). Both guards in th d' Y easy oc to secure
block, the playside linebacker should be taken care of (Diagram scoop block, and the center e I~gram are shown using the
block. The slip block is alw and playsldde tackle are using the slip
6-1). The proper call is easy for the tackle to learn, because a 44 df ays execute by the cove d r (
e ensive lineman is on them) Th fi re memen a
call should be used for the lead option against any defense that knee ofthe defensive lineman ~nd ~ocre o.ut ~ard .at the. playside
would require a 4 or 44 call for an outside veer. This similarity in up or slanting toward plays ide If th \hlm If he IS playmg head
the line blocking between the two plays is another primary reason offensive player simply tries t~ e e m~man slants away, the
why the play fits so well into the veer offense. continues upfield and picks u th i. t a pIece of him and then
angle on the linebacker and ifsh: II;ebacker. ~e .has an excellent
off the pursuit. u not be a dIfficult block to cut
blocking the offside linebacker
In an Okie defense, the offside linebacker becomes the major advantages of scoop blocking
concern. A close study of game films reveals the importance ofthis
offside block. During the first year in which we ran the lead option, This blocking
this offside linebacker was involved in nearly 80 percent of the advantages On th scheme
I d affo rd ed the offense several other

tackles. In fact, against almost every play in the offense he was
causing problems, even though the offside guard was always
assigned to block him. This resulted in two major changes. The
first change was actually mental rather than physical. The offside
outside and read t~ ~~ ~~tion, the tight end is able to release
lively blocked h e oc 109 pattern. If the linebacker is effec-
(Diagram 6-2)' Th: ~;~ceeds upfield and blocks the free safety
. er reason for the scoop and slip technique's
 COORDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEER OFFENSE 107
COORDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEER OFFENSE
106 _ _- 8

c c
c 8
s

o
Diagram 6-3
Diagram 6-2
38 Option-4 4 Call-ScooP and Slip I3locl~ing vs. Ol~ie Slant 39 Option-44 Call vs. Pro 43 Middle Stunt

problems for us before we went to th

now we actually prefer to have th def scoop and. slip block, but
improvement of the offense was that the line was able to fire out e e ense run thiS stunt.
hard on the snap. Too often against a slanting defense, the
offensive linemen begin to "sit in a hole" and hesitate on the snap. does the scoop block give linebackers a quick read?
This is necessary because they have to block a defensive lineman
who may play head up or slant either way, and they often miss him One common criticism of sco d I·
completely if they come off the ball hard. With the scoop and slip lead step by the uncovered r op an s Ip blocking is that the
technique, their blocking responsibilities are reduced by one-third playside key. This criticism m;eman gives the defense a quick
because, if the lineman slants away from playside, they let him go step also helps the lineman t y ~ave some validity but the lead
and get the linebacker. It is possible to fire out hard on the snap the line doesn't slant An th 0 gfe wood on the linebacker when
th I·
ee~s e mebackers
. 0 er actor that k
because, by aiming at the playside knee, they will always make honest is that we generally fold bl k h
good contact against a read tackle or a tackle who loops outside. On the fold blocks, the uncover:: I. w en runnmg up the middle.
Since firing out on the snap is the first requirement of good down linemen. If the linebacker k m~~en also. step toward the
offensive line play, this blocking scheme has become increasingly outside, he will be useless i t e~s t IS and qUickly flows to the
important for nearly all of the outside running plays. We now use it blocks initially look so simil:rSt~~t;~ t~e middle game. The two
extensively on all our options and on the inside veer. defense to recognize th d.ff I IS virtually impossible for the
. e I erence. One oth I h
the hnebackers honest. By usin th er p ay elps to keep
veer, we also mess up the I. : e scoop block on the 44 and 45
the scoop block against even defenses gives to the dive back 0 m~h~cke.r read when the quarterback
slants their defense the ne mg IS certain-the more a team
The same scoop and slip blocking scheme is used against technique. ,more we will use the scoop and slip
even defenses. The center steps to the playside gap and scoops the
defensive tackle if he slants toward him. If not, he continues out on
the linebacker. The guard slip blocks the tackle. He aims at his blocking the entire secondary
outside knee and, if he slants away, slips off the block and picks up
the linebacker (Diagram 6-3). The tight end can check for the
linebacker and release for the free safety if the guard has blocked pointTwo otherforimportant
in order a tea t block~ s h ould be emphasized at this
m 0 consistently break the long run. They
him effectively. The stunt by the middle linebacker used to caUse
 EAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEI\ OFFENSE
COOf\DINATIN G THE L
108
f t and the offside corner. The
are the blocks on the f~~e ~a e Xthe veer release block on the
importance of the stalk oc an emphasized and these are
b
playside secondary has a\read~ een too often fail to realize that
obviously critical blocks. But p tyer~ ays the last line of defense
the offside secondary person ne I~ a w often reduces the chances
against the run: Pursuit by thes;l~ :~:r~ust never be satisfied with
of a play breakIng all the waY· : Id have made it a great one.
a good play if just one more bIoc cou
devising ways to block the free safety
ffside tackle is generally assigned to
On all outside ~I~ys,.the ~ut frequently he simply cannot get
the free safety. ThIS IS fine,. .t is helpful to block the free safety
there in time. Because of thIS, I .ble One effective way to do
with a plays ide bl~ck~r w~enev:r ~~s::de ~ight end. Whenever the
this on a lead optIOn I~ wIth t~ t ~acker the tight end is free to
scoop and slip block ttes up ~ e ~~e ker who may get to him is the
release on the safety. The o:h erde~~se does not slant away. The
plays ide guard whe~ever . e cker against an Okie defense, but
guard'S assignment IS the hn~~~e has help from the tight end.
he knows that on a 44 ca h k block the linebacker to set
Actually, the guard only has to c etc ct he can come off the block
h . ht nd makes con a
him up. As t e tt~d fe the free safety (Diagram 6·4).
and release OUtSI e or
COOf\DINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEI\ OFFENSE 109
the offside tight end must get the offside corner
Once the lead option has been properly executed, a nd the ball
carrier picks up his blocks and breaks into the open, only one
player still has a shot at the tackle, and that is the offside corner.
The offside corner is generally the one who saves the touchdown.
His coaches tell him that this is his primary responsibility when a
run goes away-to take the proper pursuit angle and make the
tackle. For several years we really didn't worry about this defender.
The belief was that, once a back gets into the secondary, it's his job
to use some moves and break it on his own. The offside lineman
went downfield and sometimes got in someone's way, but not a lot
was said about it. This is no longer the case. For two years we
watched this one player- the offside corner-stop more long runs
than anyone else. He always seemed to have a good angle tackle
and even our best backs cannot put a move on a player who hits
them from the side. Therefore, we assigned the offside tight end to
block the corner (or the strong safety if our tight end is on the side
of the flanker). The block is not an easy one. It takes place out in
the open field and he really has to hustle to get between the
defender and the ball carrier. But he can make the key block fairly
conSistently if he is willing to make the great effort play after play.
This takes perseverance and dedication. We may run 50 plays in a
row before we break loose in the secondary where his effort can
pay any dividends. But that one time when it breaks can win a ball
game. It all boils down to salesmanship. Keep preaching about the
importance of this block and hopefully you will develop a believer
who will be willing to pay the price. We have found that the blocks
on the offside secondary have become increasingly important to
our entire offensive system over the past several years .

c •
why not combo block the defensive tackle?
We are often asked why we double team the linebacker and
not the tackle on the lead option. In other words, why not block it
Just like the outside veer? Initially, we did combo block the
defenSive tackle and then tried to slip off the block and take the
linebacker. This worked at first but then the linebackers started
flOWing too fast and we were completely missing the block. The
Diagram 6·4 bnebacker could take the quarterback and the end could take the
. 44 Call vs Ollie Defense
380pllon- .
110 COORDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEER OFFENSE
COORDINATING THE LEAD OPT/ON WITHIN THE VEER OFFENSE
111
pitch and we didn't have a play. At this point we decided to forget
the tackle and concentrated entirely on getting off on the line-
backer. This made it possible to reduce the pursuit by the
linebackers, and the quarterback was able to simply run away s C
from the defensive tackle. The tackles always have dive respon-
sibility; they are generally much slower than the linebackers and
have not been much of a factor in stopping the play. They really
only cause problems when they loop hard to the outside, but then
the tackle simply takes them out and the quarterback cuts up
inside.
As noted earlier, we want to use a 44 call when blocking the
play whenever possible; therefore, we use this call against the Diagram 6-5
Okie, pro, pro tight, eagle, and wide tackle 6. .39 Option-G Call vs. Ollie Gop-5toc/1 Defense

use a G call against gop-stock and

short yardage defenses c
When the lead option is run away from a gap-stack defense,
the G call is the best blocking scheme (Diagram 6-5). With the G
call, the tackle and the tight end have great angle blocks. When
the guard is pulled, two lead blockers are on force and there is a
great chance for the guard to block the free safety. The G call is
also excellent against the Okie 52 defense if the offensive tackle
knows that his tackle is slanting inside. The guard's rule is to pull
around the defensive end and block secondary force, but if the end Diagram 6-6
gets in his way he should run over him. This gives the quarterback .39 Option- G Ca ll vs. Split 6 Defense
an opportunity to cut up inside the guard's block on the keep. The
play has been so effective for us to the weak side that we tell our ble area, it is ideally suited to short '.
quarterback to always try to audible to the lead option whenever are forced to use this type f d ~ yardage sltuatJons when teams
the opponent shifts the gap-stack toward our flanker. o e ense to shut off the inside game.
The other defenses that can be effectively attacked with a G
call are the 71 and the split 6. Both of these defenses are variations blocking the 65 defenses with a 4 call
of a gap 8, and the center and offside line can scoop block the
middle if they stunt. Since the guards and tackles are both covered In blocking the lead option th .
defenses-the 65 goal line and't e 4 callIS used against only two
by defensive linemen in either defense, blocking the inside line- the dou ble team on the d f . he 62. The reason for this is that
backer becomes a problem. By blocking down and pulling the ~p the stunt by the outs~:nl~'vebta~kle ~akes it possible to pick
guard around the tight end's block, we get a good shot at the
h lnce both the guard and the ~:c~~ er m the guard-tackle gap.
linebacker. The lead back is blocking force for the pitch and will ead-up lineman. A stuntin' e are covered, they block the
pick up the free safety if he shifts over and plays man-to-man on can drop the quarterback bg("nebacker therefore breaks dean and
::ll.against these defens:so~~ th; p~~y even gets started. With a
our tight end (Diagram 6-6). Any form of gap defense is weak off-
tackle and outside. Since this one play can attack either vulnera-
stdl key the linebacker. 'If t~ ~~ ~ cakn start his post block
_ _ __ e me ac er stunts, the tackle
 COORDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEr. OFFENSE 113
112 coorDINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN THE VEEfl, OFFENSE

simply slips off the post block to the inside and drives the
linebacker into the middle. The tight end finishes the block on the
defensive tackle and the keep or pitch should be a great play
(Diagram 6.7). This blocking scheme is also used against both
defenses for the outside veer. This minimizes the new learning for
the line, particularly since these are the two most important plays
in our goal line offense.

c Diagram 6-8
.39 Option-G Call- Pro Right rormotlon,
L . Crocl~- [)acl~ by SE

option responsibilities and put the d f .

strong safety or corner on quart b e ~nslVe end on pitch and the
at first for the quarterback b er ac . This can create confusion
then he turns up and the str'o ecaufse t~e end key is to keep and
ng sa ety IS' h' f 0
can counteract this is to switch the . 10 IS ace. ne way you
and the blocking back. Have the t. g ~sslgnments of the tight end
Diagram 6-7 force while the lead back a b: t end veer release and block
.38 Option-4 Coli vs. 62 Glitz Defense the defensive end or 1ineba:~: u h~o:;es back inside and blocks
w c
sibility. You now have two r'l bll ever one has pitch respon·
bac k will just go to the peop
t kle ocking for ce, so t h e quarter·
running the lead option toward a split end regardless of who is taking h?C ~~en1 gap and pitch the ball
block on a slow.play end or ol:~n e ead .back has a great angle
It was mentioned earlier that you may sometimes want to split and he should be able to roll ~.nd asslg?ed to take the pitch,
an end out wide in order to enhance the passing game. We use the (Diagram 6.9). 1m up hke a window shade
pro and twins formations when it is advantageous to spread the There are two other factors t O k .
defense, and the lead option is our best play toward the split end. option switch. The dump pa ss t 0 t h e tight
eep end
10 mind when facing
. d .
The split end in pro or the inside receiver in twins cracks back on . because the safety must h f h IS now wi e open
the linebacker to free safety. The lead back then hlocks secondary you will have success Wit~~; t~~ t e ~uarterback. The other play
force (Diagram 6.8). We use either an 8 or a G call. On the G call, strong safety is looking for th outsIde veer, because when the
the guard pulls and seals inside and his rule is also "linebacker to veer generally blows right b ehq~arterback, the give on the outside
y 1m.
free safety:' If the split end has blocked the linebacker, then the
guard turns up for the free safety. It is a very easy play to execute
Q review
. of the key coaching points
and yet it has been very effective.
The lead option add I
It Is the quickest play f;raa':. ua~le dimension to the veer offense.
blocking the lead option against option switch
t~ pitch, and it is particularl a~:lmgb~h~ defensive perimeter with
One other common defensive adjustment used against option W en teams are loaded up . y .d ua e 10 short yardage situations
mSI e. E asy execution is another big
teams is the "option switch:' This occurs when teams switch their
 COOf\DINATING THE LEAD OPTION WITHIN TH,E VEm OFFENSE
114

Diagram 6-9 .
:\8 Option-8 Call vs. Option SWitch

I action for the passing game, It

Teaching the
plus, and it provides excellent p ay ainst a team that likes to fire
is also the ~est play yo~ ~ant~~nq:;rterback, because you can get Crazy Option
their defensIVe ends har. O\h k to making the lead option
so quickly to the outside. : /~backers, and if you do this it
effective is the seal block on t e In
with Trap Blocking
should consistently be a good play.

One of the recent innovations in college football is the advent

of the "crazy option." This is a severe counter option play that
incorporates trap blocking with the option attack. Another inter-
esting aspect is that the playside back is the pitch back. On the 28
crazy option, the quarterback and the right halfback take lead
steps with their left feet. Each then takes a full step with his right
foot, plants the foot and hesitates, then reverse pivots and sprints
out to option the end (Diagram 7-1).
This is a severe counter fake since the quarterback and pitch
back take two misdirection steps, and the dive is faked to the
offside back. The dive back hits at the 5 hole, fills for the pulling
guard, and then hustles downfield to block the safety or anyone
else in pursuit. Normal keys are destroyed for the linebackers and
the free safety, and they are often pulled out of position.
115
116 TEACHING THE CRAZY OPTION WITH TMP (JLOCI~ING
TEACHING THE CAAZY OPTION WITH TMP (JLOCKING
117

c c
c
v
6
Diagram 7-1
28 Crazy Optian-4 Call and Guard Logs Defensive Tackle Diagram 7-2
28 Crazy Option-Guard Traps Penetrating Taclile

the quarterback reads the pulling guard hits the read tackle and the I
'
de.enslve. tackle slants inside hn sea
'111s the
k Iineba cker, but I'f the
After the quarterback reverse pivots, he stays as close as The doo-dad block accomplishe WI oc on.and bl?ck him down.
possible to the line of scrimmage and reads the block of the pulling hit on a read tackle stops his pes steveral things. First, the initial
bl oc k '.or the guard. The secondene ration and sets I
guard. The guard will try to log or hook the defensive tackle. If he adva . up an easy og
logs the tackle, the quarterback will be able to get to the defensive will always be blocked by your tackle nt~ge ~s that a slant tackle
end for the option. You should tell him to get to the pitch if at all around the block and seal the Iineba' : oWing the guard to puU
possible. The pitch relationship is excellent because the playside always get out to the end for the t" c er. Your quarterback will
back can get well out in front of the quarterback, and the slow-play play increases immensely (Diagr~r:nI~~3~~d the possibility of a big
ends and linebackers have a tough time catching the play from the
inside. s
Several things may occur to change the guard's assignment.
The first situation is that the defensive tackle may penetrate hard
c
and make a log block impossible. When this happens the guard
will simply trap block him and the quarterback will cut up inside
his block (Diagram 7-2). This is an easy read for the quarterback
and he has a good chance to break clean right up to the free
safety. The long runs generally occur if he "cuts the grain" and
breaks behind the free safety.

Diagram 7-3
executing the doo-dad block 28 Crazy Option vs. a Slant Taclile

Another possibility for the guard is that the defensive tackle One temptation for th U·
may slant inside. The tackle's rule is to doo-dad the defensive lUll/ be to block th d' ~ pu Ing guard against a slant tackle
tackle just like on a 4 call on the inside veer. This means that he Itu e e.enslve end partie I I 'f h .
nt. This will dest th I ' u ar y I e IS on a fire
roy e p ay because you want to option the
118 TEACHING THE CrAZY OPTION WITH Tr<Ap OLOCl~I NG
TEACHING THE CrAZy OPTION WITH TMP OLOCI~ING
end. If the guard blocks him, the linebacker is free and he will 119
usually stop the play. The key against the fire end is for the pl~g by the linebacker because he . .
mIssed (Diagram 7-4) Th " will kill the play ifthis block .
Quarterback to anticipate this stunt and pitch the ball right after · b
Ime . e on y tIme th d IS
his reverse pivot. The pitch back should be wide open if the guard
seals the linebacker. I acker is When the tackle sIan . . e guar does not block the
and the tackle will slide off and b~~~~s~~e. ':Ie should then lock on,
~nd tackle have great angle blocks e h~ebacker. Both guard

the tight end uses a check veer release I Ideal for Picking up the stunt b th' a~d thIS blOcking scheme is
7-5). The offSide guard p "y e mIddle linebacker (Diagram
linebacker. u s around and logs the outside
The tight end's rule is to "check veer release." This means
that he first base blocks the defensive end for one second, but if the s
end fires inside, he lets him go. After the check block, he veer
releases and blocks force just like on any other option. The initial
check block slows the key of the strong safety or corner. With c
action going away, they will start to back-pedal, which is what you
want. Without the check block, the secondary could attack with
Quick force by a fast key on your tight end's veer release block. The
check veer release makes this impossible.

block the Okie with a 4 call

Diagram 7-4
29 Crazy Option vs . W·d
le Pro43
The blocking scheme against most defenses will be a 4 call so
that you can seal off the inside. This means that the center and the
playside guard will double team the noseguard against an Okie 52
s
defense. It is an area block so that the guard tries to slide off to the c
offside linebacker (Diagram 7-3). The only time he doesn't do this
is when the noseguard slants into him; then the center tries to
bounce to the offside linebacker.

blocking the wide pro 43 defense

The wide pro 43 defense is also blocked with a 4 call. The
playside guard and tackle initially double team the defensive 2 Diagram 7-5
tackle. The guard now uses the doo-dad concept. He hits the 9 Crazy Option vs. Pro 43 Stunt by MU3
tackle for one count and then slides inside and blocks the middle
linebacker. The linebacker will do one of two things. If he keys The blocking schem .
nearly the same (Diagra~ ~g;mst a regular pro 43 defense is
backfield flow, he will initially step away from the play and the
pulling guard will log or trap t-h )'I!he only difference is that the
guard will have an easy block. If he keys the center, he may step up no doo-dad bl e meman on yo t kl
since the center is blocking offside. The guard must anticipate the Ilkel ock by your tackle d ur ac e. There is
y to OCCur. an penetration is therefore more
 n, 7y OPTION WITH TMP GLOClqNG TEACHING THE CAAZY OPTION WITH TMP GLOCl~ING 121
TEACHING THE CI'M'-
120
end will still check veer release, but he knows he will always be
trap blocking the split defenses . blocking the corner. Both the tight end and the flanker have great
the offense to change Its angle blocks and the likelihood of a big play is definitely enhanced.
The split defenses often forc~ the crazy option is that the
blocking scheme. One advanta~eu can still use a 4 call, and the
0
blocking the 65 goal line
blocking rules do not change. 0 block the play just as they do
layside guard and tackle can.are: 7-6). The split linebackers The crazy option is also very effective against goal line and
m
~gainst a pro 43 defe~s~. (Dla~ and the guard is able to seal the short yardage defenses. Against the 65 goal line defense, the
generally slide with the mltlal fl~e layside linebacker are blocked blocking rules remain the same. The center and playside guard
playside linebacker. ~tunts by ~3. P .. . both have great angle blocks on the defensive tackles. The
. st as they are agamst a pro fi t man offside. ThIs also playside tackle doo-dads and seals the middle linebacker. The
JU , . "Man on, rs . d
The center s rule IS,b t he noW area blocks the offsIde guar -
d the offside guard pulls and logs the defensive tackle. The tight end
covers the split defense.d u r backer stunts straight ahea , kl check veer releases and goes after the corner if the flanker calls
center gap. If the offsl e me. he blocks the defensive tac e "X" (Diagram 7-7). If the tackle slants inside, the tackle locks on
k h· OtherwIse,
center will bloc I~. even defense. and closes him down and the pulling guard logs the linebacker.
just as he would agamst an t s the lineman on your tackle The dump pass (729) to the tight end off this play action is also an
The pulling guard 109~ or. r:~he split 4 defense, he logs ~r excellent complementary play and will keep the secondary honest.
against a split 6 defense. gam~ fensive end_whichever one IS
traps the outside linebacker or e
B B
playing to the inside. B
V E
00

Diagram 7-7
29 Crazy Option vs. 65 Goal line-X Ca ll by Flanller

. ~pi~(~~e;~~se-X Call by Flonher

28 Crazy Option vs. the 28-29 trap slows down pursuit
The other complementary play is the 28-29 trap. This play is
x call by the flanker blocked just like the crazy option with one exception-the tight
end blocks the defensive end and the pulHng guard traps the
.. can help to improve the ex-
One other blocking v~naty,lon n have your flanker make an defensive tackle. The quarterback simply hands the ball off to the
option. ou ca . ments. dive back and then fakes the crazy option (Diagram 7-8). The dive
plosiveness 0 f t h e crazY d the tight end change assIgn d
X call. This means that he an safety against a seven-man front ~~t back cuts behind the center's block and will even bounce outside
The flanker cracks.the stro~ght_man front (Diagram 7-6). The 119 the defensive tackle if he slants inside. The blocking rules against
the free safety agamst an elg
 TEACHING THE Cf\ALY OPTION WITH TMP OLOCKING
122
c

f'c

Diagram 7-8
29 Trap VS. O\~ie 52
Complementing the
e crazy option. It is a
. 'd ticalto t h ose 0 f th
every defense remalO I en d.t omplements the crazy option y
. I Iay to execute an I c
. b
Veer Offense with
sImp. e Pd the pursuit to the outside.
siowlO9 own Three Additional Power Plays
reasons for including the crazy option
h ou may want to add the
There are two basic reasons w YkY e First it is the best
total veer pac ag . , t
crazy option to your . f tball To stop the veer, mos
misdirection option play In 00 't . This play takes advantage
. aximum purSUl . h d
defenseS WIll stress ~ slow down the defense. T e sec~n
of that pursuit and w~1I ~elp to. I is the simplicity of the blockmg Although we are committed to a veer-option offense, there
have been years when several additional power plays helped to
reason why the play fi~s 10 ~o n~~ de guard makes it possible to get
balance the running attack. There are several conditions that must
rules for the line. pulhng t .; 0 ;~e playside guard and the t~ckl.e
an extra blocker to piaysl e. . .d veer and no new learntng IS be present before we add this series to our offensive system. The
block the play exactly as in the~;sl I:ays blocks down gives your first concerns taking pressure off the quarterback. If we do nO.t
have a good running quarterback, or if we want to reduce the
required. The fact th~t ~e :~~ ~I ~n all, it is a play that has gi~en
linemen excellent ang e. 0 . • 'th a minimum of new learntng. chance of injury because we only have one quarterback, then the
a new dImenSIon WI ff powers are a welcome addition. On the power series, the quarter-
the veer 0 ff ense I d it may really pay o. . back hands the ball off deep to the running back and is seldom
Add it to your play arsena an
Involved in any physical contact. It is also a very simple play to
execute, and the running ability of the quarterback is of little
Significance.
We are also more apt to put the powers into our system if
many of our opponents like to box their defensive ends, because
they become so vulnerable to the kick-out block by the back. In
addition, powers provide an excellent play action fake for bootleg

123
124 THr\EE ADDITIONAL POWER PLAYS
THREE ADDITIONAL POWER PLAYS

runs or passes. These are all good reasons for implementing the 125
powers in your offensive system, but this should be contingent c s
c
upon how well you are executing the basic veer attack. If execution
becomes a problem, then the first plays to eliminate are the s
powers. Keep this in mind as you select the plays you will use
throughout the season.

blocking technique for the lead bock

The power series is the 50 series and the basic play is the
56-57 power. The lead back sprints to the end-tackle gap and Diagram 8-1
sprint blocks the defensive end. This means that he gets in tight to 57 Power-4 Coli
the end and tries to "step on his toes" before dipping and exploding the mesh and the fake and h I th
through his numbers with his near shoulder. He must keep his their play execution. A ~ood b e~: te play~rs to develop pride in
head between the defender and the hole, accelerate his feet on pursuit. 00 eg ake will definitely slow down

contact, and extend through the man without leaving his feet. He
should maintain contact, uncoil through his legs and keep his feet
moving.
executing the handoff and the bootleg fake
The quarterback opens up to the ball carrier with a reverse
pivot and hands the ball off behind the playside guard (Diagram
8-1). He then carries out a bootleg fake, keeping his hands on his
far hip and hidden from the defense. After the handoff, he should
never look at the ball carrier. He carries out his fake and looks
immediately for the offside defensive end. This way he can check
on every power to see if the bootleg run or pass is open, and if the
defensive end is rushing or dropping off. He can also protect
himself from a cheap shot and should try to avoid contact.
On the hand off, the quarterback's arms should not be ex-
tended and his hands should never show past his body without the
ball. You want a close mesh with the ball carrier so that the
handoff takes place with the quarterback's body completely hiding
the ball. A good way to check this is for the coach to playa middle
linebacker and have the backs practice the hand off or bootleg
fake. He calls out which player has the ball as soon as he can
recognize it, and makes corrections if he can ever see
player's hands without the ball. This emphasizes the importance
the running bock squares into the hole
!he running back takes a crossov
the Ime of scrimmage. The uarte b er ~tep a?d runs parallel to
the playside guard and he q t ~ ack gIVes hIm the ball behind
behind the tackle. 'He wa t CUt s s arply for the hole when he is
r
I 0 ff• This way he hits
oun d·t n sth0 I.square up int 0 th e h 0 Ie and not
cut in any direction. It also iv:sl~e at a 9.0 degree angle and can
~h~nce to get through the h~'e ah~e pulhn.g guard and tackle a
IDslde the kick-out block by th I ad of hIm. He tries to hit up
through the hole following the ep~~~ b~.Ck and then accelerates
end has really jammed the b k h g meman. If the defensive
outside around the block but t~~ . ard, he may bounce to the
, IS IS only a last resort. .
blOcking the various defenses
The playside blockin in th I" .
;;eer. It will always be a g4 calle me WIll be similar to the outside
n~man on YOur offensive and a d~uble. team if there is a
:I~gram 8-1). This is the b~:~t~e Wh~ IS shading the outside
alDst an Okie 52 or a 61 d f mg sc erne that is always used
~kle slants to the inside a~~~~· Itt. b~comes an area block if the
seal the linebacker to th . ~d Ig t end would then slide off
e InSI e.
126 THREE ADDITIONAL POWER PLAYS
THREE ADDITIONAL POWER PLAYS
127
For the blocking schemes against all the other defenses, you
because of the pursuit facto~ but th
can refer to the diagrams used with the outside veer because they a wall of blockers. The onl ' I e b~ck does hit the line behind
are exactly the same. The blocking calls against each defense are pulling of the offside I' y new earmng for the line involves th
as follows: bl k Inemen but it . ~ e
oc ers because of its similarit thIS e~sy or the playside
1. G call vs. a tackle-linebacker stack in the guard-tackle gap. y 0 t e outSIde veer.
2. 88 call vs. wide pro 43, gap 8, split 6, or 71.
the 46-47 power sets up the outside veer
3. 8 call vs. split 4, 53, or 44 stack.
4. 4 call with a 4 read by the offensive tackle vs. 65 goal line or Several years ago we de I d
62. fit well into our veer schem ~~ o~.e a variation of the power that
just as they do on a 56-5/' e Ine and lead back block the play
the big difference. We had thPower. The quarterback's execution is
pulling the offside guard and tackle . a 46 -47 veer, but when he e quarterback
In tt g0 dOwn t h e line just as
the line and handed off th to II 0 ;he tackle, he stepped back off
The offside blocks on all powers are always the same. The
center blocks the "man on, first man offside." The offside guard
route on a 56-57 power bet ;'d ' he ball carrier ran the same
making his cut for the holeu(o . I n t get the ball until just after
and tackle both pull and lead through the hole. Each will take a 46:47 power is that it initially 1:~:%!-2!. The advantage of the
lead step with his inside foot and then sprint flat along the line of ThIS makes the kick-out block b the nhcal ~o the outside veer.
scrimmage and pull up tight through the hole. The guard always corner or safety don't fill insid y back a little easier, and the
looks inside first, and he will generally block a linebacker as he for the pitch first. e as fast because they have to play
comes around the tight end's block..
The tackle is pulling right behind the guard. His first respon-
sibility is to stop any stunt or penetration. If a defender tries to
c s
chase the guard, the tackle will cut him down so that he cannot c
catch the play from behind. If no defender comes between him and s
the guard, the tackle pulls up the hole and looks straight ahead for #
someone to block who will generally be a corner or a safety. His
block is the one that can break the play for a big gain, but his
speed will determine his effectiveness.
Many coaches believe that this is an impossible block and
therefore never pull the tackle. We continue to pull the tackle for
several reasons. First, our tackles have been able to get through Diagram 8-2
the hole about half of the time. The key is a combination of their 46 Power-4 Call
innate quickness and the discipline of the ball carrier to square up
into the hole. The second reason is that they have ofte n stopped
penetration from the inside that would have killed the play before bOotlegs help slow down the pursuit
it ever got started. We also seal block with the offside tight end.
This means that he pulls and blocks whomever is chasing our
tackle.
:::n Two bootlegs fit nic I .

n t e power. He must not

.
g: 56 power. The ::a~~!~~;:kPowe~ seri~s. The 856 is set by
mes es wIth the back exactly
The 56-57 power is a steady and reliable play that usually ::lIIentarily at the man t hhurry the fake and he should look
between 3 and 5 yards per attempt. It is not an explosive OPPOSite defenSive en~ w ~m he faked. Then he explodes at
an reads the block of the pulling
128 THREE ADDITIONAL POWER PLAYS
THREE ADDITIONAL POWER PLAYS
lineman (Diagram 8-3). We pull the center against an even defense 129
and the offside guard against an odd defense. The quarterback
must first try to cut up inside the center or guard's block. If the
defensive end comes upfield, the play will break off-tackle. If he
stays on the line of scrimmage or crashes shallow, the pulling
lineman will hook him and the quarterback will go around the
outside. This play has always had an excellent average yardage
per carry.

s
c
s
Diagram 8-4
41357

Ington was perfectly suited for th' I

be a great runner for I't t b IS pay, and the quarterback m t
'd' I
rt ICU ous, but it sure wa
0 e succ ess ful . On paper 't I us
k
W bl k . s pretty When M'k . I 00 S
e oc thIS play just as in the 46 I e ran It (Diagram 8-5)
Diagram 8-3 both pull for two steps and th power, but the PUlling linem .
1356 Run-8 Call the defenSive end and the guar~~ re;erse pivot. The tackle hoo~~
end. The tight end closes down a e~ ~I the quarterback around the
If a bootleg pass is to take place, the quarterback takes three reacts back-either the defenSive~ kf cks the first defender Who
quick steps and sets up behind the guard-tackle gap (Diagram ac e or the linebacker.
8-4). We used to try to make this a "run first-pass second" type of
read, but then the timing was off on the pass. In this way, the
quarterback sets up and the timing on a I5-yard sideline is almost
perfect. After he sets up, he may still scramble on his' own, but only s
if the receivers are covered or the protection breaks down. The

1
bootleg passes will be described in more detail in Chapter 11.

countering with the 046-047

The bootleg off the 46-47 power is a crazy kind of waggle
that was put in for the sole purpose of slowing down pursuit. Diagram 8-5
first, we ran the 46-47 power without any bootleg action, 1346 Woggle
players started to sell out and just fly to the football. The
waggle was developed to prevent this. The first time we ran ....
this is a special I
play in a game, it broke for 56 yards and the winning tOilChdol1lll nt of Surprise p ay and it should not be run ver
A great All-American quarterback by the name of Mike pursuit d makes it effective It t k y often. The
an it will slow people d~wn. a es advantage of a
 130 THr\EE ADDITIONAL POWEr>. PLAYS
THr>.EE ADDITIONAL POWEr>. PLAYS

on isolation ploy to keep the linebacker honest 131

s s
The other 50 series play is the 54·55 "iso." We use this play
c
1
just to make people step up with their linebackers when we double
team down on the inside veer. It is the basic isolation play where
the lead back blocks the linebacker and the ball carrier cuts off his
block (Diagram 8·6). This is another fairly consistent play but it
seldom breaks for a long run.
o

c c Diagram 8.7
55 150-4 Call V5, Slam TQC/~/e

1 incorporated into the off,

I y 0 f pIay executionense
qua /'t If
.
WIthout a s·Igm'fi cant reduction in th
. so, Use them-if not throw th
, em out.
e

Diagram 8·6
55 150-4 Call V5, Read Tacl~le

The blocking is always a double team (4 call) by the un·

covered lineman (guard or tackle). If both the guard and the tackle
are covered by linemen, it is an 8 call and the back just leads
through the 4 or 5 hole. The plays ide linemen take their men the
way they want to go and both backs read their blocks (Diagram
8·7).

why include the 50 series?

The powers and isolation plays are technically not , a part cf
the veer offense. It is logical to question the wisdom of including
them as part of a system that claims a fundamental strength in
I minimum number of plays. The reason for their inclusion is
supplemental. When teams are obsessed with stopping the
they become vulnerable to plain old "power football:' The
also take pressure off the quarterback and can sometimes
 VEm AND COUNTm ACTION PASSES 133

advantages of play action passes

from the veer offense
In the veer offense, your tight end's basic block is a veer
release block on the force man in the secondary. Thus, it becomes
easy for you to integrate the tight end into the passing game. Your
tight end's basic block is easily turned into a pass route. When this
is executed properly, the defender cannot distinguish between run
9 and pass, and the defense is presented with momentary indecision.
An offense which has the tight end blocking inside, double
teaming a defensive tackle or aSSigned to a linebacker, cannot
effectively incorporate the tight end into a play action passing
Attacking the Secondary game. The offense becomes limited in the number of receivers
involved in the passing attack.
The flanker's basic block in the veer offense is a stalk block.
with Veer and Thus, a simple pass route off the stalk block is the fly pattern. Your
flanker's stalk block and fly pattern look the same to the defense.
Counter Adion posses Again, one of the key criteria has been established, since the pass
route and running game assignments are similar.

nomenclature and pass routes

As discussed in Chapter 2, we use a three·digit number to
communicate pass. All of our patterns are numbered from 0 to 9. A
. an integrated running and play simple number conveys each receiver's pattern. This method
e veer offense gIVes yoU t the skill positions must .be Involves rote memorization by your players. The 1, 3 and 5 patterns
Th The players a k PI y action are three-man patterns involving the tight end, the split end, and
action passing game force for the pitch bac t: hta end and the flanker (Diagrams 9-1, 9-2, 9-3).
dary
able to kbIOC\~:c~~fense honest, ~nablin~ ~~~rau~~ they assilll' The 0, 2 and 4 patterns are two-man patterns involving. the
passes eep h . blocking asslgnmen s Banker and the end on the strong side. Depending on the tackle
flanker to execute t elr
ilate their pass routes. call, the backside end will either stay in and block or run his basic
backSide pattern. Your basic backside pattern can change from
. passing attack game to game (Diagrams 9-4, 9-5, 9-6).
establishing a play action ful play The 6 pattern is a one-man pattern run by your flanker.
'11 ive yOU a success ck Everyone else stays in to block. The 6 pattern is the flanker's basic
Three key ingredients WI ski play action passing atta play action pass (Diagram 9-7).
First a succes S cond the ro ute5 two. The 7, 8 and 9 patterns are routes run off play action. They are
passing game. t~blished running game. . e .dnments in
contingent on an es h Id be similar to theIr aSSI the man patterns. Again, depending on the tackle call, the back-
the primary recei~er~ s t~~ playside linebacker m~st s:eor pass. lIde end will either stay in to block or run his basic backside
running game. Flna y, dless of whether the play IS ru PIIItern (Diagrams 9-8, 9·9, 9-10).
blocking scheme regar
 VEEf\ AND COUNTEf\ A0 10N PASSES 1:l5
VEEf\ AND COUNTEf\ A010 N PASSES
1:l4

CURL
CIRCLE

POS1

DRAG

oo@oo oo@oo
o
o
o 0 o 0
Diagram 9-4
Diagram 9-1 The 0 Pattern
The 1 Pattern

FLY
POST
FLAG CIRCLE

oo@oo oo~oo
SWING

o o
o 0 o 0
Diagram 9-2
The ::l Pattern Diagram 9-5
The 2 Pattern

simulating the running game up front

FLY

It is imperative for you to convince the playside linebacker

that the play is a run. Most linebackers will read run when the
offensive lineman directly in front of them blocks down to the
oo@oo Inside. The linebacker will usually step up, looking for trap or
o Inside veer. You can give the linebacker this look by incorporating
backSide gap blocking and making the dive back responsible for
o 0 blOcking the linebacker.
With a 2, 3, 4 or 5 hole play, the dive back can be assigned to
Diagram 9-3 the playside linebacker. On 6, 7, 8 or 9 hole plays, the dive back
The 5 Pattern
 VEEf\ AND COUNTEr, A010N PASSES 1:37
VEEf\ AND CO\JNTEf\ A010N PASSES
1:36

SIDE
POST LINE
FLY
flAG
CIRCLE
SlOE
LIME
OO@OO
o
o 0
Diagram 9-9
The 8 Pattern
o o
Diagram 9-6
The 4 Pattern POST

00000
o
600@00D o 0
o Diagram 9-10
o 0 The 9 Pattern

Diagram 9-7 hits too wide to block a linebacker. Backside gap blocking can be
The 6 Pattern used only on 2. 3. 4 and 5 hole plays.
Basically. our linemen are each assigned a specific man to
block depending on the tackle call. but they will end up blocking
FLY area when the defense stunts a linebacker.
OUMP
POST
playside tackle calls
OO@OO The tackle calls are 2 or 8 on playside and 1 on backside. With
o • 2 call. the tackle blocks "man on." If there is no "man on." then
he blocks the first defender to the inside. A "man on" is defined as
o 0 • down defender. Whenever there is a "man on" both the playside
~ and the tackle. the tackle call is 8. An 8 call means that
Diagram 9-8 guard and tackle will block "man on" (Diagram 9-11A).
The 7 Pattern
138 VEER AND COUNTER AOION AASSES
VW\ AND COUNTErI ACTION AASSES
backside tackle calls 139
c s
The backside tackle call is a 1 call. A 1 call means we will
number the backside defenders. The center blocks the number 1

~!b~~~
defender to backside, the guard blocks number 2, and the tackle
blocks number 3. With the defense in a seven-man front and a
four-deep secondary, all defenders are blocked. Consequently, with
a seven-man front, you can release your backside tight end and

~
give him a pass route (Diagrams 9-11B and 9-11C). A seven-man
front also allows you to split your backside end if you prefer the pro
formation. However, if the defense aligns in an eight-man front ." CAll "/STAY/ "8 CAll "
with three-deep secondary, you must keep your backside end in to
block. Now all defenders are blocked. As mentioned previously, Diagrom 9·11 ( A )
Ploy Action Poss Protection vs 8 M F
the backside tackle blocks the third defender. When he sees a . - on ront
fourth defender, the tackle simply tells the tight end to stay. It is a
simple "stay" call (Diagram 9-11A). c s
This blocking scheme, using a 2 call on playside and a 1 call c
3
on backside, can only be used with 2, 3, 4 and 5 hole plays. E
Remember, a three-digit number communicates pass. The first
number is the pattern, the second number is the series and the
third number is the hole. Thus, "742" is the 7 pattern off 40 series
action, hitting the 2 hole. Put in another way, you have the 7
pattern with the 42 action in the backfield.
.., CAll"
"2 CAll"
blocking play action passes hitting the 6 and 7 holes
With the dive back hitting wider, he can no longer be
Ploy Action Pass Pr~;~~~~~ ~'1; ~)
. - on Front (Ollie 52)
responsible for the linebacker. You can block 6 and 7 hole passel s
in the same way as in the run. All of our 6 and 7 hole passes c
run like 46 and 47 keep. The tackle call can be 4, 44 or c
(Diagrams 9-12, 9·13, 9-14).
Remember, the 46 and 47 keep has the dive back
blocking the defensive end. Consequently, the mesh and fake
not very effective.

blocking stunts seven-man fronts

.. , CAll"
" CAll"
Blocking stunts is Simplified when using backside gap
ing. With a dive back hitting into the 2, 3, 4 or 5 hole, gap Play Action Po P Diagram 9-11 (C)
ss rotect'on vs 7 M
. - on Front (College 43)
 VEEr. AND COUNTEr. ACTION PASSES 141
VEER AND COUNTER ACTION PASSES
140
can be used. since the dive back can be assigned to the playside
s ss c linebacker. When the linebacker is aligned on the playside tackle.
c as in a college 43. then all the linemen block backside gap. With
the linebacker aligned on the playside guard in an Okie 52. the
playside tackle has to block a man directly on him. Thus. your
playside tackle does not have the great blocking angle as do the
rest of your linemen. Consequently. this could be a difficult block.
To help your plays ide tackle. have him take his man wherever the
defender wants to go. Your dive back can adjust his route to block
the linebacker (Diagram 9-15).
"4 CALL"
"8 CALL"

Diagram 9-12
646 vs. Oll ie 52 with a 4 Call

c ss c

"1 CALL" "HALL"

Diagram 9-15
\3loclling Stunts from the Ollie 52
"8 CALL"

Diagram 9-13 An important coaching point when blocking stunts is to have

646 vs. Pro 4.3 with a 44 Call your linemen shorten their initial' steps. By taking a shorter first
Rep. the lineman will be under control. This is especially impor-
tant for your playside tackle who has to react to an inside or
s outside move by the down defender over him.
c ss
As illustrated in Diagram 9-15. the playside guard and the
«:enter work as a team in blocking the noseman and backside
Bnebacker. Any stunt which has two defenders crossing will alert
the center and guard to switch men. Basically. your center and
auardare going to block any defender coming into their backside
"p. Astunt involving the backside linebacker and defensive tackle
~~d find the center and backside guard working as a team
") CALL"
",..gram 9-16).
"8 CALL"
~e backside guard and backside tackle will also block
Diagram 9-14 ever comes into their backside gap (Diagram 9-15).
946 vs. College 4.3 with a 7 Call
 YEm AND COUNTm ACTION PASSES 143
YEm AND COUNTm ACTION PASSES
142 Your offside back, the pitch back, has to block the defensive
end. Consequently, he does not run a pitch route but must run a
path directly at the defensive end.
Another coaching point for blocking stunts is to get your
offensive linemen to anticipate stunts. They should never be
surprised by a blitz. For example, your pitch back has a difficult
time blocking a fire end, so he should always anticipate a fire end.

"2 C~Lt:' blocking an eight-man front

'" C~LL"

Diagram 9-16 S The principles of blocking stunts are the same for seven-man
nac!lside Guard [3lac!ling the Eagle tunt and eight-man fronts. Your linemen are assigned defenders, but
The Center on d u
. d by a linebacker, as he end up blocking area when the defense stunts. It was the eight-
. d t kle IS covere bl k man front that caused us to assign specific defenders to our center
When your playsl e. ac II e 43, all of your linemen oc
will be with the defense I~ a c~ne~ow have great blocking ang~es and backside lineman as opposed to simply blocking backside
gap. Remember, the center blocks the number 1 defender to
backside gap. All o~ th;e::: is not stunting, you will end up with
backside, the guard blocks number 2 and the tackle blocks
(Diagram 9-17). If ~ ~h defensive tackles. number 3. Ifthe tackle sees that there is still a defender left, he has
a double team on 0
the tight end stay in and block.
We previously had our linemen block backside gap, and we
would leave a defender free. A seven-man front didn't pose a
8 M 8 E }

~~1; ~
problem, but an eight-man front caused confusion (Diagram 9-18).
As you can see in Diagram 9-19, the backside linebacker is
left unblocked. By numbering the backside defenders, this mistake
can be eliminated.

s
c c
Diagram 9-17 43
[3lac!ling Stunts from the College
. d by the play action, but your
The backfield action is determm:ibility when running a 2, 3'd'
backs always have~he s~~: r::~ is assigned to the p~~;~
or 5 hole play. our I . if he is coming on a stun. t d to
linebacker and m~st ~lo~ki~l:blitz, the dive back is instr~:ee dl"..
a Iineba~k:r;~!:~~~:\he main p~po~e Of~t~f~~: t~neback. Diagram 9-18
~~~~ ~: to hold the p~~YSi~:c~~:n:~o:\tiS fake and change
llIodling an 8-Man Front with a [3ac!lside Gap Rule
and Resulting Confusion
coming on a stunt, your Ive
route to block the linebacker.
144 VEEI\ AND COUNTEI\ AalON Rl\SSES
VEEfI AND COUNTEfI AaION Rl\SSES

c s 145
c 3
8
E T

06
"8 CALL" "I CALL" (STAYI
"I CALL- ISTAYI "8 CAU."

Diagram 9-19
13lacl~ing an 8-Man Front by Numbering the 13acl~side Defenders

E
Against an eight-man front, the playside tackle call is an 8
call. The playside tackle has to differentiate between an eight-man
front and a seven-man front. An 8 call in the passing game"
different from an 8 call in the running game. For the guard It
makes no difference because an 8 call is the same regardless Ii
"I CAll"ISTAYj
whether the play is run or pass. It only changes for the ., B CALL"
When used on a running play, an 8 call means that the tackle Diagram 9-20
block "man on." On no "man on," he then blocks inside. In Tacl~le Calls vs . 8 -M on Front
pass offense, an 8 call tells the tackle to block "man on." On
"man on," he then blocks the first defender to the lIIock~d. If these defenders use
(Diagram 9-20). 1Ipe~lJy vulnerable (Diagram 9~:jad technique, they become
e actual block executed b ..
1IIed in the running game. y the linemen is the drive block as
line technique
In a play action passing attack you must have your stunts for the offense
use an aggressive block. Particularly your playside linemen
block just as they do on the run. The reasons are twofold. As with any play .
In your offe h
your quarterback is operating along the line of sClrimlmail1 a?d stunts which can ca~::' tb ere will be defensive
opposed to getting off the line of scrimmage as in your dropbl WIth backside a rea kdown in Your
sprint-out attack. Second, aggressive blocking convinces be easily blocked. A st~':::. pr~t~cti~n, all backside st~~::
fense, especially the playside linebacker, that it is a run. to cut down the aggres~~g e enslve team will cause yOur
On a 2, 3, 4 or 5 hole play using backside gap step can lead to missed :~:~s of their first step. An all-
linemen can take a 45-degree step into their backside gap. Ignments against a blitzing
an aggressive upfield step. An aggressive step backside ~PllIJI5lide stunt that can be ve
set up the down defenders for the adjoining offensive IIr (Diagram 9-22). The (' e~ective is the TX stunt from
noseman in the Okie 52 and the tackles in the college 43 and the back ha h p ayslde tackle Usually end
end H sa ardtimeg tt· sup
. oWever, with th th e Ing over to block the
e reat of the inside veer, the
 VEE(', AND COUNTE(', ACTION PASSES VEER AND COUNTER ACTION PASSES

146 By fanning your back 'd 147

1t d~fensive
rush lane and mak h Sl e tackle, you close th Ick
.
takes longer for th: e enSlve end. end go around .eTh-IS naturally
outside
M B 1 E
B
E 00
blocking variations
There are several good blo .
"1 CALL:'
"Z CALL" ment
"I d your
" basic backs'd
I e gapckmg
pr t variations
ct' that can comple
"Z C ~LL" oa , your playside tackl d? e Ion. By adding th "
~Xchange
"1 CALL:' ments. This can b e a n dIVe back can e word
Diagram 9,,21 tackle is pia' e an especially good chang assign-
Glocl~ing the Ol\ie 52 and College 43 pe~~g~~~~~t~ ~nwa :~:~~~ pla~side
th~ II~ad c~~lque.
The only a down defender
dive back. The remainf a call are the playside ta
(Diagram 9-24). ng memen use backside gap protection
c e and

Diagram 9,,22
The TX Stunt from on O\~ie 52

defensive end should take a hard, flat route, usually tackling the "I C~LL"ISTAYI "LOAD CALL" "1 CALL" "LOAD CALL"
dive back. We school our offside back to go after the defensive
"L D'lag ram 9-24
tackle in this instance.
Exceptionally quick defensive ends are always difficult for the 742 oad" vs, on O l~ie 52 and Split 6
offense to block. With backside gap protection, your offside tackle
will sometimes encounter problems with the defensive end. By locksIfthe down defen der slants to the i .
on and the dive back blocks th tSI~e, your offensive tackle
using an aggressive upfield step, your backside tackle really opens e me acker (Diagram 9-25).
up the outside rush lane for the defensive end. We have compen-

l$~~-;;" ~
sated by having the backside tackle use a fan action to get off the
line rather than stepping aggressively (Diagram 9-23).

Diagram 9-23
Opening the Outside Rush Lone with on Aggressive Step
742 "L~ia?ram 9-25
ad vs. a Slant Tacl~ l e
Change in Technique in which the Tacl\\e Fans
 VEEr. AND COUNTH\ ACTION PASSES
'
VEEl\ AND COUNTEr. ACTION PASSES
factors. In addition . 149
athlete who is I' ~our light end is usually blo k'
m~
148
The threat of the load block gives the defensive tackle another Without the th p aymg because of his ab'n c an excellent
reat of the dum I I Y agamst the
blocking scheme to think about. The load is also a good comple- corner can play very a . p pass, the strong safet run.
s~condary
man causes real ggressIVely. An aggressive y or weak
mentAnother
to the inside veer. block. The du problems for your tight end force
ke~ps se~~n~IS
effective change-up is a G scheme. With a G call, the

,h. _, :,l:''::::l:::'~~~: ~'od ""'," ::,; :::::-:::

offside back, the pitch back, is no longer involved in the blocking honest, thus g7Jn pass a fast flowing veer release
but can run his pitch route (Diagram 9-26). ,,;,ruH'
WI eWxPhenence momentary hesitatio: rong safety or weak corner
8 8

b~
en executing h' .
width and not head up~s I~eer release, your tight end
M B N
B E E
P get
T ~?ss,
1 1 the key coaching point i e t too soon. In running the dumust
E

"666l0- 6 like a veer release blocks O°fthave your tight end make 't o
a~d ea~y re:~ r our
upfiel~ e~~st
=,~:;:;:';:::.'::':;'a~"I, ,;~:',~:',:::'~:i; ~';,'\'.;"'':'::
this results in an end will get toOo
\

0- .. "8 CALL"ISTAYI
"GCALL" backer will fly to the b~~
from the playside linebackerOO{h he
"8 CALL" ISTAY\
"GCALL" (Diagram 9 , 27). ump area after finally recogmzmg
'. . e pass
me-
Diagram 9-26
742 G vs, on O llie 52 and College 40

The simplicity of the G scheme lies in the fact that it is 000000

blocked just like the G option, with the exception of the plays ide
guard, who blocks the defensive end rather than secondary force.
o
By using a G call, your offense can take advantage of a defensive
secondary who keys the offside back's route for run or pass.
o 0 THIS

Without the G scheme, the route of your pitch back becomes a

good key. The back who cuts his pitch route short gives away pass
although we will sacrifice backfield action to use backside gap
000000cJ
protection. Even by cutting the pitch back's route short to block
the end, the defense is still initially misled.
o
By having a variety of blocking adjustments, you can keep the
defense off-balance and destroy keys.
o o NOT THIS

The Tight End H Diagra m 9-27

as to Get Width Initiall
W hen Runn ing the Dump Route Y, Not Depth,

the tight end dump pass

The basic play action pass in the veer offense is the quarterback execution on the d ump pass
to your tight end (7 pattern). The tight end's veer release
Th e key quarterback fu d
fundamental to any veer option attack. While being a basiC dlve back, resulting i~ :~~n~~lsf i~volve a good mesh with
in your offense, it is also a difficult block. It is a block that a e. The ability of your
nlace in the open field, where finesse and quickness are
150 VEEI\ AND COUNTEI\ AGION PASSES
VEER AND COUNTER AGION PASSES
quarterback to operate on the line of scrimmage will go a long way
toward establishing a successful play action passing attack. Be- always block for the third alt . 151
assume a run by th ernalJve. The tackle h I
cause of the tight end's wide release, the dump pass does take time e quarterback (Diagram 9-28). s ou d always
to develop. Your quarterback has plenty of time for a good mesh
and fake to the dive back. c S
After a good fake you want your quarterback to stay on the c
line of scrimmage. The success of his plays ide tackle will deter-
mine how long your quarterback can operate along the line.
Ideally, we strive to get the quarterback to throw the ball while on
the line of scrimmage. However, many times his throwing lane is III
blocked and the quarterback has to step back to throw. You will
find that your young quarterbacks want to hurry their fakes and
get off the line too early.
When throwing the dump pass, the tight end is your only
receiver. He is both the primary and secondary choice. We don't s
expect our quarterback to read the secondary for several reasons. c
First, a play action fake won't tell your quarterback much about
the secondary. He cannot read man coverage or zone. Second, it
becomes a difficult task to read the secondary when operating so
close to the line of scrimmage. You simply want your quarterback /2)
to determine whether the tight end is open on his dump route.
Your tight end will be open as long as there is no defender between
the quarterback and the end. The play opens for an easy gain
when the secondary force man goes on a hard flow to pitch. This II
an easy read for your quarterback. . s
A somewhat tougher situation is presented by the strong c c
safety or weak corner who reads pass. As long as the tight end ss
get between the defender and the quarterback, you can still get
ball to him. There are two reasons for believing that we can
the defender who reads pass. Number one, we have been for1lum.
/3)
enough to have big tight ends. Number two, the dump pass
short pass; consequently, the ball is not in the air for very
The only situation in which your quarterback cannot
ball to the end on his dump route is when there is a
between the quarterback and the tight end. The tight end is The ' Diagra m 9-28
instructed to turn his dump route into a sideline. Your QOs Progression on the Dum R
Pass
back's progression becomes dump, sideline, run. Ifthe tight
still covered as he breaks to the sideline, your quarterback the dump
time and turns the play into a run with himself as the ball As With eVery p Iay in your oU
As a coaching point, your playside tackle can be inS1trU(~
present problems. obv~::i there are defensive adjust-
y, a man-to- man secon dary
152 VEER AND COUNTER AGION PASSES
VEER AND COUNTER AaION PASSES
is good against most play action passes. The secondary is now defense against 153
playing a man regardless of backfield action. While it is strong the run, but is
(Diagram 9-29). weak against the dump
against play action passes, a man-to·man secondary is weak pass
against the option.
An adjustment which disrupts the timing of your dump pass is c
the secondary force man who collisions your tight end on his veer c
release. Any maneuver which throws off timing puts the pressure
on your quarterback. Your tight ends have to be made aware of
this collision technique and work to avoid contact. You may have a
tight end who is of such physical stature that he can take a hit and
recover.
Many defensive teams will work their keys so that with certain
reads the playside linebacker has no dive responsibility. These
linebackers can get to the dump area quickly, getting between the The Dum Diagram 9-29
tight end and the quarterback. Especially troublesome are outside p Pass vs. Oprion SWirch
linebackers aligned on the offensive tackles as in the college 43. Teams using this stunt .
These linebackers can create havoc with your dump pass but their free safety. The safety ~~~~~metimes try to compensate with
become vulnerable to the predetermined dive (22 dive, 42 dive, any down-the-line action b th es responsible for the du
etc.). a!so has weakside responsi~ilit e quarterback. Usual/y, the ~e~n
Finally, teams that assign the defensive end to pitch will have eIther strong or weak A 'd y and cannot cheat his al" y
him cushion the dump area. This type of defensive end will bec . WI e release b th Ignment
actually release downfield for several steps with your tight end.
t19h~mesd~n i~portant element in the y e tight end once mor:
en s WIde relea SUCcess of the d y,
With the defensive end on pitch, the secondary is playing pass all cannot break up the P::s re::~y ~tretches the safety s~~~'at o~r
the way. This defensive scheme really stretches a seven-man front after the reception F . mIght get a great hit e
:'~~~:n~or ~: ~:~~,~:et~~e~~~; l~ok ~~ r~i~r
alignment and resu1t~ in big plays by your dive back or n
quarterback. Our tig'ht r;: a: :
A e Y 10 a truly gOod
nother defensive ad'
leCondary I J ustment is a
defenses vulnerable to the dump pass defense is '. n Our nomenclature this . corner rotation in the
... t sImply changing the sec' d IS cloud Coverage. The
Just as there are adjustments that are effective in del'enllilll lIIrIat~onr~ad the rotation as he ~~e:rry ,force. The tight end now
the dump pass, there are a couple of defensive schemes that JOur r h lor any zone secondary but e eases. Th'IS IS
. a basic
most susceptible to this route. As with many plays in any offense. W~h t en~ is not well schooied one which stops the option if
becomes a calculated guessing game with the defense. ~ a WIde split by Your t1a k'
An effective defensive variation against an option team Is ... toC~~d rotatio? before the b:',e;~ t;e defense is forced to give
stunt which we have labeled "option switch:' This particular ~~~eqlle~g'tn'u.deep 10 order to cover th natJPped. The strong safety
th Your tight d e anker on a tJ tt
was discussed in the earlier chapters. Option switch is a e snap of the b en can often read cloud Y pa e~n.
in which the secondary force man and the defensive end The d all. coverage pnor
ump pass takes d
assignments. The secondary force man has the quarterback seCondary D t a vantage of a tremend
the defensive end takes pitch. It is an excellent change-up and d ~. . e enders responsible f h' ous void in a
e enslve ends Who initial/ or t IS area are line-
y must play the run. The
154 VEER AND COUNTER AGION PASSES
VEER AND COUNTER AGION PASSES
dump pass will probably become a favorite audible of your 155
quarterback when he spots a corner rotation (Diagram 9-30).

ss c
s
c E

c
.1.

Diagram 9-01
The J Pattern
Diagram 9-00
The Dump Pass vs. a Corner Rotation
reading the secondary h
An eight-man front with a three-deep zone secondary also
on t e flog route
depends on defenders from the inside to cover the dump pass area. The 3 pattern can be run off a
These inside defenders also have run responsibility and become the dump pass, the 3 pattern is d n~ 2, 3, 4 or 5 hole play. Just like
vulnerable to play action passes, especially the dump pass. overly aggressive weak 'd eSlgned to take advanta f
Sl e corne~ Whe h ge 0 an
In the veer offense, the dump pass is an integral part of your run support, your end runs his fl . b h" n t e corner comes up for
9-32). ag e md the defender (0"lagram
system. It is an important tool for your tight end in the execution of
his crucial block. It is the tight end's block which turns a 2-yard
gain into a 20-yard play. Without the threat of the dump pass, your
end's blocking success rate would be extremely low.
The dump pass can be thrown either strong or weak, and off
any play action in your offense with the exception of the outside
\ss c
veer. Given a chance, it will become a high percentage pass in your B B
H
offense. E

the tight end flog

The flag pattern by the tight end is an effective play
pass. It ties in very well with your play action passing
Initially, it looks like the dump pass. For us, the flag has been The Tight End R . Diagram 9-02
basic weakside pattern from our two tight end alignment or Unnlng His Flag [3ehind an A .
" ggresSlve Corner
twins. It has evolved into a three-man pattern with the other
Getting b h' d
as a secondary receiver. In our system it is the 3 pattern (Diilgrl ....!el1n. I e 10 the corner is wh
9-31). The 3 pattern is a read pattern for your weakside f t~e corner is not fooled b at yOU strive for with the 3
route will vary according to the secondary. Your tight end turns his fla y t~e play action and plays
g route mto a sideline (D'lagram
156 VEEr, AND COUNTEr, AGION PASSES
VEEr, AND COUNrm AalON PASSES

\
\ C
ls
ss
i
c
,
ss \
c
157

\
\
,, B M B

, \
E E E

'\
\
,
Diagram 9-33
" Q13 5ees rhe Diagram 9-34
Sat C
The Tight End Turning His Flag inro a Sideline ery an COver rhe Flag
When Corner Does Not Get Fooled by the Run Action and covers the fla

I
runnin g, you have a good
A ~w:~;:t against a rotating stron~a:~~
ep secondary will _
h
e y-
tith
your other end
The coaching point for your tight end is not to break his flag ook, and the read on the ~ ~lVe Your quarterback th
route too soon. He should not sideline until the corner has stopped
back-pedaling. The corner who is still in his back-pedal has a good
chance of reacting up to the sideline route.
, s
s ety IS the same (D' e same
lagram 9-35).

quarterback execution on the flog route c

/
The quarterback execution is very similar on most play action
passes. You will want a good mesh and fake to the dive back. Since
the flag is a deep pattern, the quarterback will continue down the
line for a couple of steps, then drop back 3 to 5 yards. The
quarterback reads the secondary, keeping in mind that his second·
ary receiver is running a post.
Let's review the reactions of the weak corner. Remember that
your first situation had the corner coming up to support the Diagram 9-35
The .3 Pottern vs. a Two-D Z
Your end easily gets behind this corner and runs his flag. eep one
quarterback must now read the free safety. If the free safety Is
position to cover the flag, the quarterback goes to the post deep~:ur quarterback should reali .
the middle (Diagram 9-34). lWeIe op:~. has covered the flag, theZ;~;~~~~h:h safe~y in a twa-
Diagram 9-34 shows the 3 pattern against a four-deep In analy . e mIddle will be
zone team. Unless the safety has cheated weak, he will ...IrtE!rbclck zmg the weak c
difficult to cover the flag pattern. If the safety has cheated :..: should d ?Tner who stays in the d .
COverage. In 't~ea thIs as a pre-rotated th e~p thIrd, Your
e, er case, Your quarterba k rhee- eep zone or
c s auld anticipate
 VEE[\ AND COUNTER AGION PASSES
VEE[\ AND COUNTER AGION PASSES be 159
156 comes an especially good
throwing to the playside tight end as he also reads the secondary
involved in weakside
T~
vulnerable to the
.
thro~:a~~pport.
'
A two-zone secon~a~yg~:s
pattern when the free saf t
tloo
am
and breaks to the sideline.

~eep
The mistake your young quarterbacks will make is not . pnmary receiver's .
runnmg a post, your end ru!attern IS modified and instead
reading the free safety properly. They will think that the flag is post over the middle alerts the a seam pattern. Too often of
open when the safety is actually in good position. Their mistake is We have had a great sa ety, causing him to la a
in not realizing how long the ball is in the air on a flag pattern. This outside veer action I deal of success with this pP tYt pass.
error in judgment can be eliminated by having the quarterback hit th b k W . n our terminolo ' a ern off
row ac . ith a right-handed gy, It is the 346 or 347
the tight end as soon as he breaks open on his flag route. In order
throwback easier to execute (D' quarterback, you will find the 346
to accomplish this task, your quarterback will have to hurry his lagram 9-37).
fake to release the ball sooner. Now the safety is seldom a factor.
~ss
the flag as a goad pattern into the c
short side of the field I
The 3 pattern is one of the few plays in your pass offense
which can be run into the short side of the field. There is one basic
change which must be made. Your tight end has to use an inside
release to give himself enough room. The read remains the same
for your tight end and quarterback (Diagram 9-36).
Diagram 9-37
s c 346 Throwbacll VS. a Two-Zone 5econ d ary
c
y\ E
8 8
E
S8
rightYour
down tight
theend can use
seam
:oulder..Any play acti'on
H
a ~U\ck
. outside release and th
;a:lI~s~natch t~e ball over his ~~~~:
:i~~ pa~ses e;,;::;;~er t~at pla~
\ e playslde end in to block. R g outSide veer action will kee
'.: off 46 or 47 action you will block
\ ~vel aCI~ load blocking the defe y.as 10 the outside veer, with
'- p ay Ike the 346 th b nSlve end.

Diagram 9-36
of a wide sl t h r o w ack can be
alfensive taO k7 ere the slot back splits the
c e and the split end.
;~eciaIlY effective out
I erence between your
The J Pattern into the Short Side of the Field

Many times an inside release coupled with a good play 1he flanker's fly route
gets the corner in a fast flow to the pitch.
~Theb'Ig
The 3 pattern can be developed into a good weaks ide V:arrflies yardage in you r veer offense is gained when the pitch
the football.
attack. With a few simple reads, your quarterback can elliIIOIL ..
lireaurdy anke wh eninto
goodr, play a :r~a~x;~:ti~1
prope I hi~ stalk block, will turn
secondary.
By adding the word "throwback," your quarterback can y. e y pattern is the pass
tho p.nd aligned with the flanker the primary receiver.
160 VEEI', AND COUNTEI', AOION PASSES
VEEI', AND COUNTER AOION
PASSES
route which complements your flanker's stalk block. In our num- 161
bering system, the fly route is the 6 pattern and it can be run off
any play action. It is the threat of the fly route that enables your
c
flanker to successfully execute his stalk block. Veer option teams
have used the 6 pattern with tremendous results. The success of
this pattern lies in its simplicity.

flanker execution on the fly route

Just as in his stalk block, your flanker will use an outside
release. The releases on the stalk and fly patterns must be
identical. Our 6 pattern is run as a read pattern by the flanker. If he
can get even with the corner, the flanker will continue to run his fly c
pattern. Once even with the corner, he will start to fade toward the
sideline and catch the ball over his inside shoulder.
The corner who keeps a cushion between himself and your
flanker will take away the fly pattern. A corner playing zone and
responsible for the deeP third is especially difficult to beat on a

I
deep route. In this situation, your flanker simply turns the pattern
into a 12- to 15-yard stop route. Your flanker stops and turns to the
inside (Diagram 9-38).
Diagram 9-38
Against a corner rotation (cloud coverage or two-zone), your The Fly Portern Deep and rh S
wide receiver must not let the corner force him inside. To run I e rap Roure
successful pattern, your flanker has to get outside the cloud
As a coaching point, you can instruct your flanker to cut down s
split versus a corner rotation. This will give him more room
c
maneuver on his outside release.
With the secondary in cloud coverage, the flanker can
pate getting the ball as soon as he breaks past the corner.
a void in the defense which we refer to as the "side
(Diagram 9-39).

quarterback execution on the fly route

Hirting rhe S'd RDiagram 9-39
With any play action pass, your quarterback's I e oeiler A .
depends on the play action. The same fundamenta ls always gOlnsr a Corner Rorarion
He must get a good mesh and fake with the dive back.
has a reasonabl
When executing a 6 or 7 hole play action pass, such corner in y good chance to be
will take longer to develop. Consequently, it will take as . a three-deep zone Th at even the most
nents a few more seconds to recognize pass. For this qUIckly as SOme of your' e defense is not able to
passes that are run off inside
 VEEr. AND COUNTEr. ACTION PASSES 163
VEH\ AND COUNTEr. A010N PASSES
162 back execution. receiver. Consequently, throwback patterns can be run off any
d0 'th your quar ter pattern involving your strongside receivers. Generally, any suc-
One final point has t~ 1 wd blocking the defensive ~ndd ~ts
l

b k who IS oa . g OUtSI e.• ou cessful pattern involving the flanker and the tight end will provide
~!:~~v:~:d~~ou:~uarterback c~~ec~~:!~~: ;:;~~ur quarterback
good throwback action. For example, if the free safety is cheating
on the dump pass, you will want to have a throwback off the dump
t the pressure on
have really pu . (Diagram 9-40). pass. A simple communication system involves calling a particular
has a pass-run option pattern and adding the word "throwback" along with the particu-
s ci; lar throwback pattern. Thus, "742 throwback post" would have
ss / the weakside receiver running a post route off the dump pass.
c
E
E
/
/
o /
throwbacK post
The throwback post is designed to take advantage of a fast
Rowing free safety. This type of free safety not only gets involved in
the running game, but also overcommits in defending the pass. If
you are successful with a particular play action pass, you may find
. 6!:~~~~h~-~~fenSive End \-\oohed the free safety eager to help his teammates. The throwback post is
Q {} Execution on designed to settle down an active safety.
ide veer action, the Our post pattern is not the traditional post route run into the
route 0 ff outs k v
When he throws t h e fl Y sh with the dive bac . •our deep middle third. We run it more as a seam route with the receiver
'11 ot get as good a me h' load block. The running in the seam between the deep middle third and deep
quarterbkack'~~i;iust a little wider to eXhec~~e e :nd drop straight outside third. It can be run from both split and tight alignments by
dive bac WI '11 me straight down t e 10
your backside end. A split end will make a move toward the middle
qua~~b:~ ~~e ~~ht end's original align7:;t~uarterback is also and break up the seam. Your tight end will use a quick outside
bac :t ~s the flanker reads the cor~e;~ker's route. When your release and run straight down the field (Diagram 9-41).
. Ju corner to anticipate. the uld hit the flanker lUll The throwback post will be successful only if the cornerback
keymg ~he k reads a corner rotatIOn, he.~h~ocket A good, strong has to cover your end with no free safety help. The pass fake to
~~a~;e~r:~ks past the corn~r ii~~~;h:u:rt:rback ~aits too long. formation strength has to fool the free safety. It is important for
safety can cover the deep Y WOur quarterback to give an arm fake to the appropriate strongs ide
receiver and look the free safety off for as long as possible. Looking
throwbacK pass off play a
cf10 n the free safety off involves concentrating on the receiver whom
JOUr quarterback wants the safety to cover. He must not look
d be able to throw to the A 1IIckside until he is ready to throw. Your quarterback should be
A good pass offense shOUlcially effective off play acti°"but ~cted to keep his throw to the inside, for the defensive corner
back attack can be espe t 'n the secondary,
h
trOW . ou movemen 1 rd your have no free safety help. You want your end' to catch the ball
fake not only gives Y ets caught flowing towa OD1Pon,e~ his inside shoulder.
backside linebacker also : ck attack, yOU force your U the free safety has not been fooled and is still playing his
. With a good throw a
action. . Id I middle position, your quarterback should tuck the ball and
defend the entire fte . give yOU a comp ete a runner. To throw the post with a safety in the middle
Three basic patterns can are designed for your
offense. These three patterns
 VEEf\ AND COUNTEf\ ACTION PASSES VEEf\ AND COUNTEf\ ACTION PASSES 165
164
8 c 12- to IS-yard pattern with the receiver circling into the middle of
88 your formation (Diagram 9-42).

$
o@ooo , c
o o
o 0 '~~~JJ
c
8
c ss
Diagram 9-42
742 Throwbacl~ Circle
oo@ooo
o o Your end uses a quick veer release and circles into the middle
o 0 between your backside tackle and center. He must never go further
than the center, for the playside linebacker can now cover him. A
Diagram 9-41 r Ali nment5 split receiver will run the same route but will not get as far inside.
The Throwbocl~ P05t from Tight and Sp It g As the end makes his break to the inside, he simply finds the hole
In the zone. There is no set distance or disciplined number of steps
. h b II I'S in the air for so long. for the end on his circle pattern. He has to react to the defense. For
t' smce t e a . be example, against a tight playing man-to-man secondary, he may
third is a sure intercep Ion b ks will throw the interceptIOn .
Your inexperienced quarte~ ac is open. Your quarterback hashtOt run a little deeper pattern and then come back to the quarterback
thO k the receiver I ng even w a to get separation.
cause they m 'th the ball in the air for so 0 d' b the free
remember that, WI. ceiver is soon covere y A coaching point for your quarterback in executing a
to be a wide-open re throwback circle is to look the defense off and keep the ball low.
:~fe~~~~hO iS notdo~~e~~~~:~;~k post to b~ especia.lI~ epff:s~~i~~
We have foun flanker runmng a qUIC . Ii
His point of aim should be the belt buckle. Any pass into the
middle of the defense is dangerous. A high or deflected pass will
our 9 pattern, wh~ch ha;. t~~y to any post pattern with the Idea Nault in an interception.
free safeties react I~me 13 e
punishing the receIVer. Ihrowback fly
The "throwback fly" is the play in your offense which takes
Idvantage of a backside corner who pursues too early. It is not a
blah frequency pass. The situation and personnel have to be just
light, It is a pass used in a definite run situation while you are in
OWn territory. One of your faster ends should run the fly route.
 VEEI\ AND COUNTEI\ ACTION PASSES VEEII AND COUNTEII ACTION f¥\5SES 167
166 s
d and the defensive c
between your en h
It often becomes a oot ra~~ veer release and tries to run p~st ~ e
f
ss
corner. Your end uses a qUiC d t rts to fade toward the sldehne
corner. After 15 yards, the en s a
(Diagram 9·43).

s
c
B SS
Diagram 9·44

;J 142 Hide

Your tight end blocks down for three counts, helping the
tackle with his block. After counting to 3, he runs across the field
at a depth of 5·7 yards.
Your quarterback can execute an extended ride and stay along
Diagram 9·4:l the line of scrimmage. He throws a soft pass to the end just as your
7 42 Throwbocl~ Fly end gets around your backside tackle. Have your quarterback stay
on the line of scrimmage unless his throwing lane is blocked,
t back will execute this play better going forcing him to step back.
A right.handed qu.ar er k to his left.
to his right and throwmg bac quick post to the flanker
A good change· up for your tight end and flanker in the
other game-winning patterns off play action execution of their assignments on the inside veer is a cross block.
that are good routes off play Rllther than using a stalk block, .your flanker will now crack back
There are several other patte~ns h oute mentioned for every on the strong safety. Your tight end will veer release and block the
action. Naturally, you will not:e~:ct ~~~ ;ppropriate patterns for a comer, the flanker and end having simply switched men (Diagram
g ame. It is left up to yo~ to f d'lfferent patterns from week to 9-45~
t Usmg a ew . A When you use this blocking scheme, the quick post to the
particular opponen . . d the element of surpnse. s
week will give you vanety ~~ ing to do too much. lanker becomes a good complementary pattern. For us, it is
we must always beware 0 ry labeled the 9 pattern and can be run off any play action. Your
linker, liS always, will use a slight outside release. Remember that
Wllnt the corner to see the same initial release on every play
tight end delay of whether it is run or pass. Since an outside release is
. st teams bBllIc to the flanker, he should have his outside leg back. Your
". ttern use d agam f should explode off the line and make his break on his third
The "tight end delay IS a pa I takes advantage 0
not drop their defensive end~. It a :~e tight end delay Is He runs past the strong safety and then up the seam. Your
flowing linebackers. In our 0 ense, end runs a swing pattern and might be open if the secondary
hide" (Diagram 9·44).
 VEE[\ AND COUNTE[\ ACTION PASSES VEER AND COUNTE[\ '"'
A'CTION PASSES 169
168
le~seWhen throwing to the fI k
the ball before his receiv:;b er, your quarterback should re-
~~
b k
::~~~;hs:~~dye. Trehceiver to cat~~~~sePb'::l~ ~~:tS!~o~;bsafetkY' This
e quarterback h rea s past
rea past the strong safet w 0 waits for the flanke
that the free safety is a n Important
. y before releasing
factor (Dthe
' ball 9-47).
will d'Iscover
r to
lagram

s ' C
\ QB RELEASES
sl x HERE
Diagram 9-45
Cross l3Iocl~ [letween the flanl~er and Tight End E /\
I
on the Inside Veer I
I
is in man coverage and the strong safety plays run. Also, the zone I
corner who collapses inside with the flanker will leave the tight I
/
end open (Diagram 9-46).
Th Diagram 9-47
s e Q[l's P-elease on the Quidl Post
c
The quick post can b e ' .
action" With your tight end ~~::~il:IlYd effective off outside veer
more lIkely to come up for run g ow~, the strong safety is
support (DIagram 9-48).

S
c c

Diagram 9-46
942-Quid~ post to the flanller

The strong safety is the key for your quarterback. \I the stroll\l
safety moves toward the line of scrimmage in run support Of
o.~~ __-
toward the sideline to cover the end, your flanker will be open. T Diagram 9-48
strong safety who just sits or moves back is probably in some he Qud Post off the Outside \veer-
I 946
of umbrella coverage, in which he is playing the flanker's
routes. This is not to be confused with a corner rotation
coverage), in which the strong safety moves to the deep
third. Against cloud coverage, the quick post to the flanker wiD
open. With the strong safety in umbrella coverage, the
back should look to his end to see if he is open.
 ADDING A Df\OP()ACI~ PASSING AnACI~ 171

000(8)0
o

10 , Diagram 10-1
[lodlfreld Action in Flood Series (12 )

Adding a DropbQck
ooo®ooo
Passing Attock ,
VO
, Diagram 10-2
[lodlfreld Action in D'rvr'd e Serres
' ( 14)
A dropback passing attack gives you a well-balanced offense.
The split backs in the veer offense are easily adapted into a quarterback set-up
dropback passing game. A successful pass offense will force your
opponents to playa balanced defense. The threat of the pass wID In both the flood and divi .
force your opposition out of an eight-man front . : hind. the playside guard. Co~:ese~les. our quarterback sets up
\Ie hl~ setting up behind the r. q entiy. 12 o~ 14 action would
would lind him behind the left ~ht gua~d. while 13 or 15 action
nomenclature PltteOrn. our quarterback will usg ard. With the exception of one
ur quarterback e a seven-step drop.
We have developed two separate series of dropback action: leries d opens to his right ·th
It II an to his left with an odd b WI an even-numbered
flood series with both backs and the quarterback going in pass all the way. num er. There is no play fake. for
same direction. and a divide series with the backs going
opposite directions. Our quarterback sets up behind the
guard in both the flood and the divide series. .hot Jeceiver principle
For us. the flood series is 12 when going to the right and
when moving to the left. Our divide series is labeled 14 and We have incorporated the hot rec . . .
flood series has the offside back blocking the playside _llCka.attack. Very Simply th. . elver principle into our
end (Diagram 10-1). Our divide series has the playside unblocked and controll:~~n~olve~ hleaVing the playside
'--__ 1m Wit a hot receiver. Our
"I~~I-;nn the end (Diagram 10-2).
 ADDING A D[l,OP[lACI~ PASSING ATTACI~ 173
ADDING A DPDP[lACK PASSING ATTACK

172 d' th is identical to your play action pass blocking. Your line assign.
'd d or back depen 109 on e ments are made easy by using the same protection lor dropback
h I YSI e en ' . th
hot receiver is either t epa layers will always run a route 10 e and play action passes. While the blocking rules are identical, the
attern. One of these p h 'f the linebacker comes on a technique is different. When blocking for play action, you want
pass Pf the playside linebacker. T us, I ted by the linebacker.
area 0 . the area vaca . .. your linemen to use an aggressive block. In protecting a dropback
t there is a receiver In f using a hot receIver IS m
stun, h ' advantage 0 I k d' thO passer, your linemen can show pass setting up on or off the line of
As we see it, t e mal n I ' d defender unb oc e ,10 IS scrimmage.
tection. By leaving a p aysl e block backside and have
pass pro rnemen can b k .
the linebacker, our I .. th playside line ac er IS
case . les In addItIon, e
great blockmg ang· fng line technique in a dropbock passing attack
quickly discouraged f~o~ ~:i~~ ~ead is always the playside ~inek
Our quarterback s m~ . volved in a stunt th~ quart.er ac There are some basic techniques of line play that are unique in
backer. If the linebacker I:~~oads to the hot receIver (DIagram protecting a dropback or short sprint·out passer. (By short sprint·
. d' ately pulls up and It in a big play. Teams who
Imme I nd can resu . b k out, we are referring to the quarterback who sets up behind his
10.3). This is a soft pass a nse while stunting a hne ac. ~r are tackle.) The linemen are no longer concerned with concealing
'lI'ng to play zone defe . Some teams are wllhng to
are WI I bl t the hot receIver. k D f s pass. The defenders will see the ball going off the line of scrim·
especially vulnera e 0 hile stunting a Iinebac er. e ense mage instead of down the line and will know that the play is pass.
gamble and give up a zon~e~ stunting their linebackers are ~o~ as A basic yet important skill for an offensive lineman is simply
who play man cover~ge w I om the hot receiver. Howe~er, It IS a the ability to get out of his three·point stance and into a hitting
susceptible to the b.lg play I~ be completed even aga~nst m~n position. This initial phase, getting out of the stance, is where
short pass and wll~ ~s)u;h~ advantages of the hot recetver rna e many linemen get beaten. They are slow in getting set, thus
coverage (Diagram 1· . allowing the defensive men to accelerate to them. You can help
it well worth the gamble. your linemen by emphasizing two things. Number one, they must
s c push off with their down hands. At the same time, have them snap
their heads back. This is all done on the snap of the ball. By
c pushing off and snapping their heads, your pass protectors will
have momentum going up and off the line into a good hitting
position. A good hitting position is a two·point stance with a good
base. The feet are at least shoulders·width apart. Knees are bent,
with the butt low, back straight and elbows in. Foot movement is
atremely important. The feet should be moving in short, choppy
1Iepa. It is imperative for your lineman to be set in a good hitting
JIOIItion before the defensive lineman comes in contact with him.
Diagram 10·3 . 1be alignment of your linemen on the ball can help give them an
. to the Hot (1.ecel ver lIIra split second to set up. Our linemen align as far off the ball as
ThrOWing 'd Lnebocl~er Stunts
When the Ploysl e I the rules permit. Not only does this help our pass protection, but it
makes scoop blocking a little easier. As mentioned earlier,
blocking is an integral part of our running game.
Your linemen have to realize that pass protection is a passive
simple line blocking as Opposed to the aggressive blocks used in the running
. lour linemen can use k A good pass blocker gets few opportunities to punish his
As discussed prevIous y, y. Thus your dropbac
~ _ . __.'nn in UOur dropback senes. '
 ..
------------~===:::::::::::
ADDING A D I\OP[\ACI~ PASSING ATTACI~
I

ADDING A DI\OP[\ACI~ PASSING ATTACK 175

174
tor is usually easily beaten. In pass the pass protector a nd the pass rusher. In a situation like this, it is
man. An aggressive pass protec . rtant Your linemen should critical for the offensive lineman to use some variety in his
., b comes a il -Impo· . I' technique. A good change-up is to give the rusher an outside rush
protection, posltton e. 'fce osition. An aggressIVe meman
not do anything that wIll s~cn I th~ offensive lineman who gets lane and then use his momentum to drive him past the passer. The
will miss his defender. . ve~ . per position is usually offensive man opens up his hips, locks on and runs with the
ed while malOtalOlOg pro defender. An important coaching point is not to let your lineman
overpoWer
successful. I ·tioned offensive lineman takes open his hips and turn too soon. He must wait until the rusher has
Overpowering a proper Y Piosl position usually opens up a his inside leg past him. With the inside leg past, the defender has
time. The pass protector who oses reached the point of no return and has committed himself to an
quick lane to the quarterback
k . the back of the head to the
Proper position involves eepI~~ defender and quarterback.
outside rush. If your lineman turns too soon, the rusher can come
back inside and have an open lane to the quarterback.
quarterback and staying between t e back keep their shoulders Another variation is to have your linemen cut the defender.
The linemen closest to your quar ~rhave the luxury of allowing They can either cut right away or deliver a 6-inch punch and then
square to the line of scnmmag~ a~d or outside rush, then using cut. However, as a general rule, don't let them cut a rusher who is
the defender to t ak e either an kmSIh ' e past your quarterbac. k The quicker than themselves. A quick pass rusher will beat a slower
, tum to ta e 1m f player and get to your quarterback.
the defender s momen k the inside rush and orce an
. further away must ta e away To throw off the timing of the pass rusher, another good
Imemen
outside rush. . d h·tting position, they have to wait change-up is to have your lineman attack the defender and then
With your linemen m a goo II rox'lmity They deliver a retreat and set up. It is a good variation against the rusher who
t within c ose p .
for the defender to ge. into the defender. Many coaches uses a lot of fakes. He now has no chance to use his moves.
controlled blow explodIng u~s a "6-inch punch:' Your offensive Many times a lineman is beaten by the defensive man but
refer to this controlled blo~ not out. By going out instead 01 up. recovers and still wins the battle. There are a couple of good
people must explode up an h' balance. The 6-inch punch il counter moves that you can teach your players. The first involves
they will overextend and lose t elfb d To maintain position and the pass protector who has lost his balance as a result of being
delivered with the arms and u~p~r 0 ~hould remain bent. When pulled forward by the defensive man. In this predicament, simply
keep from overextending, thel~ ~ie~u will find overextended, oul instruct your lineman to "sit down" so as to regain his center of
the legs become extended (str~lg . Y blow your pass protector gravity. When balance is recovered, your lineman can resume his
of position linemen. Aft~rl dyehverlll~n~;an will give up ground ID pass protection. The term "sitting down" means getting the butt
t nd recOl. our low so as to regain the center of gravity. The movement to regain
should retrea a . . with the defender.
order to avoid gett~ng. tted ~~ective is to beat the pass protectar balance is similar to simply sitting down. .
A pass rusher s first 0 J b k Upon recognizing pass, he Often your linemen will find that they have allowed their
between him and the quarterffac.' man striving to get to opponents to grab hold of their jerseys in the shoulder area.
t to the 0 enSlve, . . Remember that the basic pass protection stance will keep the
taught to acceIera e set in his two-point hIttIng
before the pass pr~tecttr gets bbing the offensive lineman soeel tIbows in. With the elbows inside, your lineman will have his arms
A basic pass rush lovo v~s gra h allows himself to get tI laeide t?e defender's arms. When the pass. rusher grabs your
Id
turn his shou ers.
The hneman w 0 . .
'11 t beaten. For this reason, It IS :=:;an s shoul~er, instruct him to keep his elbows in and drop his
with the pass rusher WI ge d not to give the pass A..-. s into the nb cage of the rusher. The lower arm will form a 90
to hit, retreat and recoil. I\or ;:n should keep their _ e angle with the upper arm. As the defensive player tries to
something else to grab, you~ m~ack pass offense, the the shoulders of the offensive lineman, he will have him
When you execute a r.op he ball. More so than _ oeq, thus keeping his shoulders square. If he keeps his fist
people know the ex~ct I~cattbon of ~s a one-on-one duel your lineman will not be called for holding. The oppo-
runnl'ng game ' the. 0 sltuatton ecom
176 ADDING A Df\OPOACK PASSING ATTACK
ADDING A Df\OPOACK PAsSING ATTACK
nent is neutralized because, although he has a grip on the the tight end will be covered b 177
shoulders, he cannot get them turned. into his zone. y the strong safety for h ' .
A very popular and successful pass rush technique involves a , e IS gomg
head slap with one hand and swinging the other arm over the 8
head of your offensive lineman. This is commonly known as a sWim c
technique. It is technically illegal, but very seldom is the penalty 88 C
called for the head slap. The offensive pass blocker must not allow
the head slap to turn his shoulders. He must stay square and
punch with his opposite shoulder into the numbers of the defensive
lineman, while he keeps his feet moving in order to stay between
the defensive man and the quarterback.

reading the secondary for man or zone coverage

Diagram 10-4
In a dropback series it is important for your quarterback to A Strong Safety in Man (
read the secondary for man or zone. He must be conscious of the average
secondary coverage in order to anticipate which receiver will be c
open. 8
Secondary coverage is most easily determined by reading the
defenders on your strong side or two receiver side. Against a four- 88~
deep secondary, your quarterback will look to the strong safety. f
With a three-deep secondary (eight-man front), he will read the
free safety.
We use two basic principles in reading the secondary to the
strong side of our formation.
1. When the opposition is in a four-deep secondary
man front) an inside release by the inside receiver will
Diagram 10-5
your quarterback to determine man or zone.
A Strang Safety in Zone (overage
2. With the opposition in a three-deep secondary (ei'lht-JII
front), an outside release and outside pattern by your Many times a three-dee se
receiver will allow your quarterback to determine by their alignment. A safety ~~n~arYh will give the Coverage
zone. in man Coverage. Howev 0 IS C eated to the strong side
Let's discuss the four-deep secondary. With the inside
COVerage by always cheating t't:'te~ms can disguise man or
using an inside release, a man secondary will have the • th it up on the snap of the b:lJs~ety to your strong side
safety collapsing inside to cover the receiver (Diagram l04~ B ree-deep secondary, the i 'd
or l!~ur quarterback to
strong safety ignores this inside release and stays outside, ~ r;leas.ing immediately int:s~he ~ecelver must release
zone coverage (Diagram 10-5). the ermme man or zone (D. e at, your quarterback
ese basic reads lagrams 10-6 and 10-7)
An outside release and outside pattern would tell VOUlr III ur
man or zone cov:r:;e T~~art~rback will be abie to
h"rk nothing about the secondary coverage. If it is zone lRCeivl~r will be open. . IS wIll help him to discern
 ADDING A Dl'OPOACK PASSING ATIACI~ 179
ADDING A Dl'OPOACK PASSING ATIACK
178
l
\ s
c
B B
o
Diagram 10-8
The [3a cl~fi e l d Actian o n a 12 Series Pass

D' rom 10-6

By adding words we can change the route of the playside
Chear'i~~ to 5trangside but Playing Zone back. For example, "012 flat" would have the back and the tight
A 3-Deep Sa fe ty end changing routes. The tight releases inside and is hot, while the
back goes to the flat (Diagram 10-9).

c flood patterns to strength

There are several excellent flood patterns to formation
strength. The flanker, tight end and back will be involved in a
variety of coordinated patterns.
Regardless of the particular pattern, 12 and 13 series passes
toward the flanker will all involve some of the same basic
principles. First, the playside linebacker will be unblocked and
your quarterback will control him with a hot receiver. Next, your
Diagram 10-7 . Man to-Man quarterback will read the strong safety to determine man or zone
Cheating Over and PlaYing -
A 3-Deep Sa fety coverage. When they are in zone coverage, pressure is put on the
IIrong safety by putting two receivers in his area.

dropback flood series . .

d pback flood senes IS . \he flanker's curl pattern
We have mentioned that °fur ro patterns by insertIng
any 0 our t en In our nomenclature, the curl is the 0 pattern. The huddle call
12 and 13. We c:n ~u~ront of the series number. For Id have ... be "012 flat:' Your tight end uses an inside release and is the
appropriate num ~r 1~12, etc. These patterns wou
receiver. The flanker runs a curl, breaking at 15 yards and
can run 012, 31 , h' d the right guard.
quarterback setting up .be m the playside back runs ~ back to the quarterback. Your plays ide back will be in the
·th 12 and 13 senes passes . d· the hot receIver. (Diagram 10-9).
WI kl his sIde an IS 'd
route through the tac e o~ble for blocking the playsl e The tight end uses an inside release. He must not come too far
offside back will be responsl but must head upfield. If he comes too far inside, the
end (Diagram 10-8).
180 ADDING A DfIOPOACK PASSING ATIACK
ADDING A DROPOACK PASSING ATIACK
181

c
ssA
oo@oo
o /
/
/

/
/
/
/
yo
Diagram 10-9
012 Flat

backside linebacker becomes a factor and might be able to knock

the ball down if your quarterback throws hot. If he is having T ,Diagram 10-10
difficulty releasing inside because of the defensive end, your tight 'f hhrawlng to the DOc/I in the Flat
end should take a wider split. Your tight end keys the playside I t e Strong Sofety Cushions the Curl

linebacker. Unless the playside linebacker stunts, V';,Jr end will not
get the football. After a depth of 10 yard~, he will hook either which is 15 yards downfi Id h
inside or outside in an effort to get free of the backside linebacker. zon.e. coverage. Against ea 'zo~:h~Uld know Whether it is man or
antrclpate sliding inside t e can round his cut-off d
We assume that the playside linebacker will attempt to cover the
curl by your flanker. get inside the defender re~p~~s~~e~ are~. Instruct your' f1anke;~o
The back in the flat is a secondary receiver in most situations. quarterback will have an open th e ?r t e flat. This is where your
The important coaching point is to have him run directly at the should not come too far ins'd hrowrng lane. However, the flank
curl. lew ere the linebacker can h~r
strong safety and then break to the sideline at a depth of 6 yardJ. cover IS
By running at the strong safety, your back is heading upfield and If your flanker reads man c
can make other cuts off this basic route. Consequently, in Is the defender he has to beat o~erag:, he knows that the corner
I/Ood cut to increase his . . Our anker now has to m k
coverage, the linebacker has to respect the threat of an best w t . separatron from th a ea
route. The strong safety is able to cushion the curl a little CO :y 0 rncrease separation is t i e corner. PrObably the
but if he cushions for too long, you will have a good gain I/I~e ack to the quarterback by 3 ; 0 ~ ant the outside foot and
throwing to the back in the flat (Diagram 10-10). u~ catching the ball at around 12 Jards. Your flanker may
The flanker running his curl is your primary receiver. You •1IVe1~a,elnltker should square his sh:u~r s. After. making his cut,
your flanker to use the same outside release as he uses on all to catch the bad ball. der to give him lateral
patterns and in executing his stalk block. The corner aligned
the flanker will see the same release on every snap of the bail
exception is when the flanker is involved in a crack back execution and second
ary reads
the strong safety.
As the flanker releases, he must key the strong safety We want our QB to set up beh '
leven-step drop. As with all h .rnd the playside guard. He will
his peripheral vision. Awareness of what the strong safety ls
OVer the top and does this b pa~ses: ~our QB has to bring
will enable your flanker to distinguish man or zone
.elbow even with the sh y mal.ntarnrng a high elbow. We
Consequently, by the time your flanker gets to his breaking
I!
Will step toward his targ~~~~e~6 ~~t higher. A consistent
a IS stomach and chest
182 ADDING A DI\OP[lACK F1\SSING ATTACK
ADDING A Df\OP[lACK PAsSING ATTACK
are facing the receiver. To get a tight spiral and a catchable ball, 183
your QB has to develop a good release, rolling his thumb to the c
outside. c s
Before the snap of the ball, we have our QB check secondary
alignment. First, he will check the free safety. With the safety ssr\
cheated to an extreme position, either strong or weak, our QB will
be conscious of a blitz from the secondary and will use his
audibles. When the QB reads a normal alignment by the free ooo~oo
safety, he will look to the strong safety. A strong safety aligned o
head-up on your tight end usually indicates man coverage. A Wide
alignment usually means zone coverage. A cloud rotation toward o
the flanker is also easily determined by the deeper alignment of the
Diagram 10-11
strong safety. ' The Strong Safet . Z
Covering the Flat ~:~ °h Coverage,
In many games your QB will be unable to determine the ne
secondary coverage before the snap of the football. A well- us IOnlng the Curl
schooled secondary will disguise their coverages. Your QB has to safety stays in the curl ar '.
read the strong safety after the snap of the ball to determine man Ihe back in the flat wh e~. In thiS situation, he has to th
s
or zone coverage. safety Simply cushi~ns thOe OUlld be open. However if the rOt w to
Let's go through the QB reads on "012 flat." Remember that 8I cur mom t . ' s rong
a , your QB should be able t th en anly and then goes to th
the playside linebacker is unblocked and is your QB's first read. If
the linebacker stunts, the ball is thrown to your hot receiver-the !::tet: makes the mistake of cU~hiO~~~ t~hhis flanker. If the stron;
ave to go with the shorter . g e curl too long, YOur QB
tight end. strong safety is Simply bUYing t. ga;" and throw to the back Th
When the linebacker does not stunt, your QB reads the strong
curl. To ~elp your QB, this par:i~~ or the Iin~backer to get t~ th:
safety for man or zone coverage. With man coverage, the strong normal situations. By "normal" ~tar ~attern IS best When used i
safety will collapse inside to cover your tight end. IeCond and 5
A strong safety in zone coverage either comes up to cover lit ' or t h'lTd and 4 In Slth
uallons w .
. ' e mean first and 10
n
IIld Is a gOod secondary recei~er. I es: situations, the back in th~
back in the flat or back-pedals to cushion the curl (Diagram L..._ 10, the back in the flat. n a ong yardage Situation tho d
Regardless of the coverage, your flanker is the -=aus h IS not a d ' IT
receiver. By reading man or zone, your QB will know who . aDaliloe;n. e probably won't get the fi t ~oo secondary receiver
responsible for covering the curl. A zone secondary will try to Ian't re~r,~ro~~niS tempted to forcer:he ~~~~~~h: ~;;kyardhage
linebacker or end into the curl. Man coverage tells your QB A' . erWen
gaIDst a team that I .
the corner will have to cover the curl. There will be no umlen•• -!facIe.. pays a lot of .
coverage with a man secondary. To determine if the
open, your QB simply looks for separation between the n~.,k"r. ~ ~~::~w~~e~~w.~~I~"~I~run the 0 pattern with azone
it will be "012 " Th
IUlagraa,rnssignments with the b
Withd'"very little m an
slightl
y luerent wrinkle
ke:'ayside back and the tight
the corner. Obv/ 10-12). ac ot and the tight end in the
The most difficult read for your QB will be a zone ously th t· h
which has the strong safety hanging in the curl area melmllob
The strong safety will cushion the curl and then come up to
the back in the flat.
b ' e Ig t end is able
tt
.
no~~ If t~ strong safety cus~~;se!~nto e flat quicker
~~".o ~ WI e open for a good gaO e cur too long, Your
You never want the QB to throw to the flanker if the o Our oPtion runnin m.
To change up option ~ogame, we do see a lot of zone
verage, the defense will Use a
 ADDING A D[\OPGACI~ PASSING ATTACK 185
ADDING A D[\OPGACK PASSING ATTACK
184 play action or dropback, we throw the fly route to the flanker. Your
G
entire passing game will be improved if the secondary always has a
s deep threat. When using play action, your flanker sets up his fly
S8 route off his stalk block. Dropback action has him setting up his fly
c route off his curl. Your flanker can actually break down, give a
slight inside move, then take off on his fly route. This is an
especially effective pass against a tough man corner who is
00000 playing the curl. Again, your flanker uses an outside release as he
o does on his curl pattern. At a depth of 12 to 15 yards, he makes a
slight inside move and actually steps inside with his inside foot.
o Next, he pushes off with his inside foot and explodes past the
defensive corner.
Diagram 10-12
55ure on the Strong Safety The fly pattern can be run off any play action and fits in well
putting IncreosedhPreT" ht End into the Flat with our strongside flood series. In our nomenclature, this is "312
by putting t e Ig
flat" (Diagram 10-14).
. e "012" or "012 flat" can be especially The playside end uses an inside release and is the hot receiver.
lot of corner rotation. Th e since there is no secondary pers~n He runs a post if there is no safety in the middle of the field. When
effective again~t cloud cOVr~gis imperative that your flanke.r ~III there is a safety in the middle of the field, the end turns his post
who can cushIOn the cur. d not get forced to the inSIde Into a circle pattern, where the tight end gets 15 yards downfield
uses an outside release and oes and stops in the middle of the formation. The offside end rUnS a
(Diagram 10-13). deep flag route, while the playside back runs his flat pattern.

S
QB execution and reads
c
B B Your QB will again set up behind the strongside guard at a
E T H depth of 8 yards. With the strongside end releasing inside, your QB
~b~b II able to read man or zone. Originally, this pattern was set up for
IIIIn coverage. It takes advantage of the man-to-man corner who
playing the curl very tightly. It will also take advantage of the
corner who is cheating on the curl.
As with all of our flood series passes, the playside linebacker
unblocked and controlled by a hot receiver. Your QB must
Diagram 10-13 . the strong safety for man or zone coverage. If he reads man
0 12 V5. Cloud RoTotto n he tries to throw to the flanker. The back in the flat is
a good secondary receiver against a man secondary.
the defense in a zone coverage, your QB should now
his tight end. However, even against zone, you don't want
the flanker's fly pattern give up on the fly pattern too soon. Sometimes a zone
. alwayS
backfield actIOn, we get fooled and react to the flanker's curl. For the most
No matter what th~ ttern by our flanker.
opponents to defend the Y pa
186 ADDING A DROPOACK PASSING ATTACK
ADDING A DROPOACK il'ISSING ATTACK
187

I
C I
.L I
oo®oo I
OO®OO
I
I

Diagram 10-14
312 Flar Diagram 10-15
312 Flar VS. 2 Zone
part, your QB should realize that a good corner playing a zone to allow the flanker to cI th
defense will not get beaten deep. Usually, your QB throws to the II k · ear e area y, d '
an er running downfield to eth . au on t want the end d
tight end who has turned his post into a IS-yard circle pattern. He of the end in order to clear t: er. Your flanker has to get ah and
ends up right in the middle of the zone and is usually open. backside post route whl·1 th e a rea. The offside end runs h· b e~
e e Playsid b k. IS aSIC
A secondary often gives away cloud rotation before the snap our system, this pattern is "812 fI t" e(D~c IS again in the flat. In
of the ball. Even if they can disguise their corner roll prior to the a lagram 10-16).
snap, it is easy to read once the ball is in play. Against a cloud
rotation, you want your QB to throw to the flanker as soon as he
comes off the corner bump. This is the area we refer to as the
pocket:'
If the defense is rolling both corners and playing the
halves with the safeties, your QB now has an excellent omlortulll
for the big play. In this situation, the big play involves
strongside end running his post pattern (Diagram 10-15).
oo®oo
We refer to this type of secondary as two zone. Your QB
/
be sure it is a two zone and not a three-deep zone with
rotation. Against three zone with a cloud rotation, he
your flanker in the side pocket. There will be a safety in the
of the field to take away the post. Th . Diagram 10-16
e Tighr End's Deep Sideline-812 Flor

The strong ·d
the tight end's deep sideline Il!le Sl e end is the primar .
18~:e2~e can be used as a hot r~c;~v~~v~. Becau~e of his
This pattern has your primary receiver, the str,on!.- his patt yards deep. Against zone e want hIm to get
running a 20-yard sideline. He releases inside and i ern and simply find the h J c~verage, YOur end can
further into the middle. You want your end to come mSIU- ,,! 'Qlelinnem.an
•. WhCoverage ' h e h o e In hthe zone. With th e
astomake
en running this patt a s. arp cut and sprint
ern against a man second_
 ADDING A Dr.OPDACK PASSING ATTACK 189
ADDING A DROPDACK PASSING ATTACK
188
running
'd a fly pattern , our QB IS
. sc h ooled to th
ary, we let the end break sooner because there is no underneath the Sl e pocket versus a corner roll If th row to the flanker in
coverage. He usually makes his cut at around 15 yards. Again, the side pocket by holding up th fl k e defense takes away the
key coaching point is to have your end bend in a little on his diately to the tight end The a~ er, the QB ,should go imme-
. ere IS no stron f
pattern so that he will stay behind the flanker. un erneat h coverage and th d f . g sa ety to provide
d
10-18). e e ense IS vulnerable (Diagram

QB execution and secondary reads

Your QB will again set up 8 yards behind the strongside
c
guard. The playside linebacker is his initial read because he is
controlled by a hot receiver. He then reads the strong safety for
man or zone coverage.
With the defense in a zone coverage, your QB is usually able
to throw to his end. Even if the strong safety cushions, the end will
be open since this is such a deep pattern. However, if the strong
safety gets a deep drop, the back in the flat is a good secondary
receiver (Diagram 10-17).
Diagram 10-18
s I 812 Flat vs, Cloud Coverage
c
c } Against a man secondary the QB h
end making his cut a little soo'
. .
Th s ould anhclpaie his tight
55
M makes a good sharp cut to getnoer. ;:nd bre~ks at 15 yards and
outlet if your end is covered. Th~e~.
T E B"""---:: /
B E T e back 10 the
IS IS normall h' hflat is a good
/
oo@oo /
/
/ pass, because your back is co
be a mismatch in speed.
d b ' y a Ig percentage
vere y a hnebacker, and it should

).-.¥-~/r !he offside end's deep across pattern

/
Another route to flood the stron si .
Diagram 10-17 pattern to your weakside d Yo g de IS the deep across
Throwing to the [locl~ in the Flat CII' zone coverage The en. ~u read the strong safety for man
When the Strong Safety Drops Deep Clluerage to make' a de~~i~~u orc~ the strong safety in zone
liang deep in h' . He either has to cover the fI t
I IS zone. a or
The free safety will sometimes cheat and attempt to cover JO.19~ n our offense,IS
th' route is labeled the '5 pattern (D'I3gram
Th
end. When this happens the backside post should be an
completion. IfIIIlerne, He primary
uses receiver
an insidis theI weaksid e end runnmg
. an across
It is obvious that our strongside flood series operates on b e re ease and gaO d h
basic principle of flooding the strong safety's area. He has to e at least 12 yards d b lOS ept. Your end
I!IIIiltioln Once across the fo eep t' y thhe time he gets across the
a decision and your QB simply reads him. A cloud rma IOn, e gets into the seam with
"~ "n easlJ read. On any pattern which has the
... n r n .....
 ADDING A Df\OPOACK PASSING ATIACK ADDING A DroPOACK PASSING ATIACK 191
190
delay patterns off flood posses
A good defensive adjustment to any flood series is to drop off a
maximum number of defenders into the underneath coverage.
Okie teams will drop the end into the flat, thus freeing the strong
safety from flat responsibility. This is a sound defense against our
oo@oo flood series.
o We have simplified our QB reads by making them the same
for all strongside flood patterns. Because of this Simplicity, we ask
our QB to go one step further against an Okie team. He is
Diagram 10-19 Instructed to get a feel for the defensive end. We want the QB to be
512 Flat aware of whether the end is rushing. The end who drops into the
Oat communicates to our QB that the defense is using maximum
h f ter of the ends, runs the underneath coverage. We now get the offside back, who is respon-
. d depth. Our split end, teas
width an . sible for blocking the defensive end, involved in the pattern. As he
oute . . de and is the hot receiver. comes over to block, there is no defensive end. The back will turn
across r · d Iso releases lOSI h th free
The strongside en a st pattern throug e to the inside and make a "bingo" call. Hopefully, our QB has
, "d d runs a po d t
He continues lOSI e an . fl route. The flanker an s rongsl
'de
anticipated the bingo call. We now have a delay to the offside back.
safety. The flanker ru~s hlfS ~he acrosS route. Here agam, the Our QB holds on to the ball and takes two additional steps back to
. Iy c1eanng or
end are simp h' basic flat route. luck in the defensive rush. At the last possible moment, he throws
plays ide back runs IS to the delay back. Thus, on any 12 or 13 series pass, there is always
the possibility of a delay to the offside back (Diagram 10-20).
QB execution and secondary reads
. s patterns, H Q B uses a seven-step
ourkeys s
As with the prevlOU the piaysl'de "nE!bacllll
III c J
d are the same. e
and the initiaI rea s f an or zone coverage.
and then the strong s~fety n~r c~verage is read as in the b B
/ ss-
The strong safe~y lo ZO k the back in the flat . e
patterns. If he cushIOns b:~afety who covers you~ b~ckd~~cult
An easy read is the stron is run so deep, It IS I
Because the across pattern
linebackers to cover.. iall effective when
The across pattern IS espec y It is a difficult pattern
a secondary playing man ~~:e~:~~. in the flat takes the
weaks ide corner to cover. e and leaves the across
out of the underneath coverag Diagram 10· 20
Underneath Coverage, so QI3 Goes to His l3ingo Call
o en. . r QB the option of
p A cloud rotation gIVes y~~1 throwing to the acro s.s. d
flanker in the side pocket ~~: Isecondary has committe anticipate maximum underneath coverage, our QB can
route will open because delay in the huddle. It can be called off any 12 or 13 series
cover the flat.
192 ADDING A Df1OPJ)ACK PASSING ATTACK
ADDING A Df10PGACK PASSING ATTACK
pass by simply adding the word "delay." The offside back now 193
knows that he will be getting the football. The line blocking stays be a IS-yard circle route By add' "
told to run a post patte;n. 109 throwback post," weakside is
the same. If the playside defensive end is rushing, your delay back
must block him for two good counts and then turn to the inside. He The hot receiver, either the stro .
approximately 10 yards Thl's . nbgslde back or end, hooks at
catches the ball right around the line of scrimmage. By turning to t Q . receiver eco
the inside, as opposed to the outside, your delay back blends in .or your B (Diagram 10-22). mes a secondary choice
with the pass protectors and is not so obvious to the defense.
Again, your QB must hold on to the ball until the last moment and
set a little more deeply. By holding on to the ball, your QB gives
the underneath coverage a chance to get deeper in their drops.
A delay to the tight end is also very effective. It, too, can be
run off any 12 or 13 series pass by simply adding the words "tight
end delay." There is one major change. The offside back runs a
backside swing pattern. Your playside end blocks the defensive end
for three good counts and then drifts across the middle (Diagram
10·21). The line blocking stays the same and the playside back is
the hot receiver. So, on any delay, if the linebacker blitzes, your
QB will throw hot.
Diagram 10-22
012 Throwbacl~

. The circle route run by the weak . .

discussed in Chapter 9 It . 15 Side end IS the same route
00 QSJ 0/ . . • IS a
coming Inside no further than the "
-yard patt .h
.ern Wit the receiver
onglnal alIgnment of the cente~

\/
Hrun from the pro format·
IOn, Your split e d b k .
post and then runs his circle rout (D' n rea s on a three-step
e lagram 10-23).

Diagram 10-21
012 Tight End Delay

throwback off the strongside flood series

As with any pass series, we want the opponents to defend
entire field. It is important to be able to throw back to the
off strongs ide flood action. We can run any of the pre'.
mentioned patterns with throwback possibilities by calliJlf~
pattern and adding the word "throwback." This cOlmn~u~IIClIII!
the weakside end that he is the primary receiver. His 012 Th Diagram 10-23
rowbacl~ from a Pro Formation
 ADDING A Df\OP()ACK PASSING ATIACK ADDING A Df\OP()ACK PASSING ATIAO; 195
194
. d uses a quick outside release,
From a tight ahgnment, ~~u~ :.: is going deep. His cut is made c I
c
trying to convince. the ~orner id: foot at approximately 15 yards.
by pushing off wIth hIs outs the end has to make a good
d in man coverage,
With the secon ary h QB Against a zone defense, your
sharp cut and come back to t e .
end will find the open spot in the zone.

QB execution and secondary reads

seven-step drop. His initial keys are the
Again, your QB us~s a ood attern. The important coaching
same as in any str~ngslde fl I o~ing playside, to look off the free
point for your QB IS to keep 0 Diagra m 10-25
The Throwbacll Post from a Tight Alignment-
safety. tt is used when the offside line-
The throwback ~ircle pa ern h on flood action. Against the 812 Flat Throwbacll Post
backer is really flowmg ~o sS!~~~eakside linebacker to determine
Okie defense, your QB k f yh r backer has not flowed very fast, In executing the throwback post, your QB must keep the ball
which receiver is open. I . t ~ m: g hook area (Diagram 10·24~ Inside and let his end run under it.
your hot receiver is open m t e s ron

flood patterns to the weakside

c c
Any strongs ide flood series involves. three receivers, while a
E weakside flood attack will have two receivers. The principles used
In the flood series to strength also apply to your weakside attack.
The playside linebacker is unblocked and your QB controls him
IVIth a hot receiver. The hot receiver is either the back or the end.
There are two receivers in the area of the weakside corner, forcing
hIm to make a decision. Finally, your QB attempts to read mari or
lOne coverage by reading the weak corner or weak linebacker,
Diagram 10-24
Reading the Weal~side L[l an 012 Throwbacll depending on the pattern. It is more difficult for your QB to
determine man or zone coverage in a weakside attack. A three-
. . th middle of the field lnebacker defense or Okie defense that drops their ends will cause
When the free safety is leavmg be From a tight JIOblems for your QB to read. .
b k t should e open. .... The end or back always runs a flat route. With the end in the
action, the throw ac pos. k outside release, running h
ment your end uses a qUlC ..d We don't want t e - YOur QB can key the corner for man or zone coverage. When
upfieid and bend.in Sli9~tly to ~~~I~n:h:~e the safety can
g back goes in the flat, your QB reads the backside linebacker
running his post mto the eep:;1 t ps getting inside the the coverage. Remember, the flat route run by the back will
A split end breaks inside for t ~ee:~ 10-25 l. him running upfield and then breaking into the flat at 6 yards.
and then runs up the seam (Dlagr
 ADDING A DI\OPOACI~ PASSING ATTACK
ADDING A Df\OP[)ACI~ PASSING ATTAm
196 h flat is most likely in 197
The linebacker wh 0 g oes
. . immediately to ted rop s to the curl or
'f the linebacker QD execution and secondary reads
zone coverage. In additIon,
erage.I
hook, he is in zone cov
As in all 12 and 13 series passes, your QS Uses a seven-step
drop and sets up behind the weakside guard. His initial key is the
playside linebacker. He keys the linebacker for a stunt. Against a
the tight end flag pattern from a two-tight-end two-linebacker team like the Okie, Your QS can read this line-
. b ckside pattern backer for man or zone Coverage. A man SeCondary will have the
route is a baSIC a nd is "313 flat."
linebacker in the flat Covering the back. A linebacker in a zone
::~ge ~~
The flag this is the 3 pattern a k .de flood is an inside
defense will drop hook to curl. A stunting linebacker forces Your
on~ ~he
alignment. For for the end on we: . linebacker stunts. II QB to throw to his hot receiver.
The hot receiver if the wea Sl tinues downfield and
release. He IS t get the ball hot, he con h' s flag if he is able to Your QS Usually throws to his end and anticipates the sideline
do~ n~t ~n a~not if the corner takes away the flag route. If the corner rotates up to
~n ~our ~eline.
the end 12 yards. He continues beat the corner
breaks a agcorner. Only when en . The end simply cover the flat, the end should be Open. However, if the safety is able
get behmd the h t urn his route mto a sdl s a flag or sideline to cover the flag, your end turns his flag into a sideline.
on a flag does e of the corner an run Mliny teams playa two-deep zone with both corners rolled up.
reacts to the coverage
(Diagram 10-26). An experienced QS can take advantage of a tWO-deep zone by
throwing to the backside end running a post pattern (Diagram
10·27).
~
s J
~ c
C
M
E
ss
\ /
/ /
ss
,~~ /

~
T T
I c

0;;;0 I J.

Diagram 10-;~ onsible for the .

313 Flat Against a ~~~n~r~ Js Flag into a Sideline
D P Outside Third, the
ee 'de Diagram 10-27
st as in the strongS I ThrOWing to the C3ac/~side
End vs. 2-Deep Zone
r~ ns his flat route. Ju breaks at 6
The back the weak corner and then at the strong
series, he runs:. running his flat route, r:~ in the same
strongside bac . ' 10 he weak corner is trea e Against a two zone, the playside end will also be open. We tell
On the weak Side, t
the strong safety. ~"'IDS l:hal the flag will be a first down While the post could be a
 ADDING A DROPOACK PASSING ATTACI~ ADDING A DROPOACK PASSING ATTACK 199
198
that it is either a corner rotation or man coverage. In either
the weakside bock's flog pattern situation, he realizes that the back will have to beat the free safety.
. . . ·lar to the previous pattern except that the Again, your QB anticipates the back turning his flag into a sideline
ThIs IS very sImI . Th d runs his flat route to get open (Diagram 10-29).
back and the end switch ~~Ig~~en~~ur ~l:side back runs his
while the back :?e~ ~o If t~e lin~backer does not stunt, the back s- - _
banana route an IS o . Th d is in the same 0 pattern that we
then runs his fl~g rout~ Toe t~: weak side, it becomes "012" or c
have already dIS~US~\i utes have the flanker running a post
l
"013 flag." The ac sd e ro t s his basic backside circle route
pattern while the en execu e
(Diagram 10-28).

Diagram 10-29
Throwing to the Ooell as He Oreolls to "the Sideline to Get Open

If the safety is really flying out of the middle of the field to help
on the flag, your flanker will be open on his backside post. This
might make it difficult for your QB to go to a third receiver.
However, to help your QB, you can call the throwback in the
huddle, making the flanker your primary receiver.
Diagram 10-28
Tight Left 012 Flag
the curl pattern
th d your back has to beat
If the corner rotates up to c~ve~ .n~t:~c~ed to turn his flag Into From the pro formation, the weakside curl is an excellent
the safety. In order to get open, e IS I pattern. The split end's curl is just like that of the flanker and is
a sideline. IIso labeled the 0 pattern. The 0 pattern has the wide receiver
lXeculing his curl while the inside receiver is in the flat. When
running this pattern weak, your playside back has to initially run
QB execution and secondary reads ilia banana route. When he doesn't get the ball as a hot receiver,
four QB. Naturally, he gets into the flat (Diagram 10-30).
This is a simple rea~ .p.attern or Yhe then keys the Your strongside receivers run their basic backside patterns
playside linebacker is the Imtlal reat~::~d in the flat will be lpin. The flanker runs a post while the end runs a circle route.
If the corner drops and sta~s deep, t d op since he can The main coaching point to remember for the split end on his
y, QB may not get to hIS seven-s ep r ,
Is to get inside the defender who is responsible for the flat. It
e;~~ and throw quickly to the end i~ the flat. n the ~nYnpr CUlf be a IS-yard pattern with your split end coming back to 13
Our QB throws to the back on hIS flag .whe our QB
up to cover th e flat . With the corner commg up, Y
 ADDING A Df\OPOACK PASSING ATTACI~ 201
ADDING A Df\OPOACK PASSING ATTACK
200
screens. For us to incorporate the same blo k' h
the hot receiver principle on screens. c mg sc emes, we use
We run a middle screen off flood a t·
"013 screen." Initially, the line blocking i~ :~~ ~.nd I~al1 it "012" or
\
\ or 13 series pass . The ml'ddle screen IS . runn just
Ica 10kany
\
0

thother
d I 12
except that now the ball carrier has Ii . leo e e ay,
\ playside back is hot and will get the ba~~~~n :~ f~ontkof him. Your
\ o~oo in the delay, your offside back comes over bl~c~et~c S de~ stu.nts. As
\ for two counts and then moves inside beh d th e e ens.lVe end

{/-o
0

10-31). m e center (Diagram

'\

Diagram 10-30
Pro Right 01 J Flat

QB execution and secondary reads

This is a good pattern against a three-linebacker defense like
the college 43 zone. Your QB simply keys the outside linebacker
for flat or curl coverage. He then throws opposite the linebacker. It
is assumed that the middle linebacker cannot cover the curl. This
assumption can be made because of the alignment of your split Diagram 10-31
end, who takes a good split. For example, with the footb all in the 0 12 Screen
middle of the field, your split end aligns on the numbers between
Your center and playsid
the hashmark and the sideline.
By keying the weakside linebacker in the Okie defense, your walt for the "go" call f t~ g:ar d bl ock for three counts and
their blocks. Any line':;:; he. ack. .AII other linemen stay with
QB is able to determine man or zone coverage. A zone secondary
can also get into the scree ';. 0 IS assl~ned to block a linebacker
has the linebacker dropping to curl while a man secondary hal
• defensive tackle or e dn· 00 ~any times a ~creen is stopped by
him covering the back. An Okie defense will also have trouble
covering the curl with their linebacker, and your QB can anticipate
defense, we want to bl n thO
oc
k
S w enever possible, as in the Okie
ese people all the way.
the curl being open. However, if the defensive end on the weakside
does not drop off, but is instead involved in the pass rush, your
Uklcking on eight-man front with flood series posses
back in the flat will be open.
We will
~lerrlso Th attack an elg ht-man front with
0 0
0 . strongside flood
we wO:ld~clfic patterns depend on the secondary. Orig-
screens off flood action _llaf.,tu Wh ead man or zone coverage by the alignment of
A complete pass offense has to have some type of a zone :,:::~~~:~fety ~as in the middle of the field, we could
slow down the defensive rush and linebacker drops. To strongside end ~h':Vlth the safety cheated over and aligned
, IS was read as man coverage. We soon
simple, our linemen have the same blocking assignments
 ADDING A DIIOP[)ACK PASSING ATTACI~ 203
ADDING A DIIOP[)ACK PASSING ATTACK
202
discovered that these rules don't always hold true. A good
secondary disguises their coverage. A safety cheated over and
aligned on the strongside end is in good position to play either
man or zone.
Our basic strategy is to throw the deep post to the flanker
against a man secondary. The reason is that there is no free safety
help for the corner. When attacking a zone, we like to attack the
flat and deep sideline area.
When the defense is mixing zone and man coverage, run a
pattern allowing your QB to read the secondary. The flanker runs a
deep post while the end runs his flat route. For us, this is the 2
pattern. Man coverage will have the safety coming up to cover the Diagram 10-33
tight end in the flat. The QB should throw to his flanker who is 012 vs. a Man Secondary
running a post. This is a great match-up since the corner has no
(Diagram 10-33). There is no free saf t y
free safety help (Diagram 10-32). with your back on a linebacker If 0ue and you have a mismatch
now that t~e defense will be
k
In a zone coverage, the deep sid r-
Is "812" or "813 flat." Remembe~ ~~e to your end IS excellent. This
/ with his fly pattern (see Diagram 1;~~).ur flanker clears the area
c B
s-l-
B /
E running a flood series with no hot receiver
I
For some reason, such as an inex .
to use some of these patterns pe~lenced QB, you may want
ICheme, but don't want our and thIS backside gap blocking
the word "solid" you y QB reading a linebacker. By adding
, c a n use some of fl
bot receiver. The playside b k' your ood series without a
p1ayside linebacker as opp a~ t IS responsible for blocking the
Diagram 10-32 ling him with a hot 'receiver o~~ 0 your QB reading and control-
The QO !\ecognizing Man Coverage and Throwing to the Post-
Everything stays th . lafgram 10-34 illustrates "012 solid"
CIII I e same or your . . .
2 12 Pattern on y changes your playsid b k' re~ammg players. A solid
e ac s assIgnment.

The safety who stays in the middle of the field is most
zone coverage. Your end should be open in the fl at.
Another good pattern that helps your QB to determine
or zone coverage is the 0 pattern.
With the secondary once again in zone coverage, your
should be open in the flat. Because there is no strong
cushion the curl, your flanker should be open. Man CO\leragt,1
your QB looking for the banana back deep down the
Rlnning a d raw off dropback action
A .
drawslow
playdown
servesththe sam e purpose as a screen. An effective
will
has to be made a:~r:s~f~USh and Iin~backer drops. The
COni~nn off the line of s . he fact that Just because the QB
cnmmage, the play will not always be a
 ADDING A DI\OPOACI" PASSING AITACK 205
ADDING A DI\OPOACI" PASSING AITACK
204
against an odd defense has the most difficult block. However, the
c s c QB drops away from the hole and this serves to influence the
SS-""'- noseman.

pressure the backside with a divide series

Our divide series has some points in common with the flood
passes. The QB still sets up behind the guard, but his depth
depends on the pass pattern. We label our divide series 14 and 15.
Our 14 and 15 series has the playside back blocking the
Diagram 10-34 defensive end while the offside back runs a swing pattern out the
012 Solid backside. Up front, the blocking stays the same as in the 12 and 13
series. We control the plays ide linebacker with a hot receiver. Pass
. s a delayed isolation off flood action. blocking rules are thus kept simple for your linemen. On any 2, 3,
Our draw play IS run a ber one down defender, and the
4 or 5 hole pass, the linemen have the same blocking rules. The
The playside guard blocks the n:m two down defender. The center
only difference between the different passes is in technique. On
Playside tackle blocks the num ler block (8 call). We have the
I' play action passes, you want your linemen to use an aggressive
and back Sl e to emen base-ru
'd 'f e block and then execute an
. b k t up as I to pass . . . I block.
plays Ide ac se la side linebacker. QB executton IS sImp e. Any pattern can be run off 14 and 15 action passes. Some have
isolation block on the. p Y h i d between the two backs, and been especially successful for us.
b k poslte the 0 e an
~~p~rt~: b;f toOihe ball carrier (Diagram 10-35).
the quick out
s
c The quick out is a pattern used by a wide receiver and can be
c run either strong or weak. Because it is a shorter route, we teach it
E T as a six-step pattern. Since our wide receivers have their outside
feet back, their sixth step has them making the break outside by
ob pushing off with their inside feet. We want the flanker to come
back toward the line of scrimmage after his cut. This increases the
separation between the flanker and man-to-man corner. As the
leceiver makes his break, he should snap his head to find the
football, which should now be in flight.
Diogram 10-35 We like this pattern off 14 and 15 action, because the playside
A Delayed Isolation Draw-84 Draw back is blocking the defensive end. The playside back can get to
the end quickly and uses an aggressive cut block. You don't want
. our 12 the defensive end to be in a position to knock the ball down, since
. is not the same as In 1& in the line of flight.
Even though the pla~ act~on draw play is present. The
13 series, the key ingredIent or ~ e causing the In Our system, the sideline route by a wide receiver is the 4
brings the ball off the line of scrtm~~re~t play for us. The A normal 4 pattern is a 12-yard sideline. By adding the
read pass. The draw has been an ex
 ADDING A D[\OPOACK PASSING ATTACK ADDING A D[\OPOACI~ PASSING ATTACK 207
206
word "out," we change to a quick out. Consequently, the pattern s
c
we are talking about is "416" or "417 out" (Diagram 10-36). In C
running the quick out to strength,' the tight end runs a hook .J...
pattern in the seam. He runs up the seam and turns to face the QB
at approximately 7 yards. Now, rather than standing still, your end
should back-pedal away from the QB at a 45 degree angle, getting
width and depth. The purpose of the back-pedal is to get away
from the linebacker.
01//
/
. Diagram 10-37
ThrOWing to the End in the Seam VS. a Carner Rotation

throwback flood to the weakside

We have developed an excelle t th b k fl
and 15 action. The line blocking st: , :~w ac ood pattern off 14
hot receiver. The pattern is labeled ~~ : same because there is a
Diagram 10-36
setting up behind the stron side e ~attern and' has the QB
"114 throwback" In th' g guard. Diagram 10-38 illustrates
416 Out . IS pattern, the flanker ru
weakside end runs a circle route and th b k ns a post, the
pattern. Your stron sid d . ~ ac executes his swing
receiver. After not ~etti~=~h:~e:lIa~ I;s~de :elease and is the hot
getting no deeper than 7 yards. 0 , e rags across the field,
QI3 execution and secondary reads
This is one pattern where your QB has no hot receiver. The
play hits fast, so your QB has a chance to release the ball even
with an unblocked linebacker coming at him. The footwork for
your QB is a five-step drop. When he goes to his left, a right-
handed QB will drop six steps.

__ r-.y
When he throws to the strong side, your QB keys the strong
safety. If the defense has a corner rotation (cloud coverage) with oo~oo
the strong safety rotating to deep third, your QB throws to his end
in the seam (Diagram 10-37).
A corner roll takes away the quick out to the flanker, but yrtfI
end will be open. Your QB also throws to the end if the
safety is aligned wide and does a good job of getting und,ernl!lllt.
Diagram 10-38
the flanker's out. Any other situation will have your QB thrc:nvbII
11 4 Thrawbacl~
to the flanker. '
208 ADDING A DROPOACK PASSING ATTACK
ADDING A Di"\OPOACK PASSING ATTACI<
209
QB execution and secondary reads Regardless of the coverage we talk
safety who cheats to help on the circle.t~~ur QB. about the free
Your QB reads are the same as in a strongside flood pattern. want our QB to throw to the fl k en thIs happens, we
The playside linebacker is unblocked and is controlled by a hot . an er who is r . h'
pattern (Diagram 10-40) Once a ' .h unnmg IS post
receiver. The QB keys the strong safety for man or zone coverage. the deep middle, the de~p post b;::,n, WIt h~ohfree safety help in
As your QB reads a zone coverage, he keys the backside mes a Ig percentage pass.
linebacker in a two-linebacker defense (Okie) or the middle
linebacker in a three-linebacker defense. This is the linebacker /1s I
whose area is being flooded. He has to cover the strongside end's
drag or the weaks ide end's circle. Your QB throws opposite the _ ss I ".,
C
linebacker. B B /
We make the assumption that the outside linebacker in a T N T {
three-linebacker defense will always hook up with our swing back,
so we key the middle linebacker. Okie teams who drop their o0 ~O 0 1

\{
weakside end also have the end cover the swing back. The
backside linebacker has to cover the drag or circle (Diagram
10-39). Most linebackers are well-schooled against the tight end
drag and will usually jump on the drag. Consequently, the circle
will open up.
Diagram 10-40
c Tailing Advantage of the Safety Who ~ . H I
,nes to e p on the Circle

Diagram 10-39
114 Throwbo cl~ Against a 43 Team in a Zone Secondory

This is an especially good pattern against man

because you get a mismatch with your back on a linebacker.
also difficult for the strong safety to cover the end on his
addition, the circle can be wide open with a good inside
your end since there is no underneath coverage.
 COACHING OOOTLEG AGION 211

Coaching Bootleg Action Diagram 11-1

4[123

pattern. If the corner stays deep, then he hits the sideline. The
strong safety will not get under the sideline because the play action
Is away from him. The free safety has trouble covering the flag for
. efits nicely into the veer package the same reason-the weakside play action will begin a weak roll
The bootleg passmg gam d. ension to the offense. You caR or will at least freeze him in the deep middle zone.
. dd other counter 1m . Id . Against cloud coverage, the tight end runs a deep curl out
because It a s an hree different types of backfie ?CtlOR
actually run bootlegs off .t for each one. This helps to tie the pattern and settles into the "soft spot" in the zone. There will be no
and use the same blockmg t ether and the counter flow taka bnebacker under coverage with the weakside play action. The
running and passl·ng games og , e
the linebackers out 0 f th under coverag .
e
.L.
f
d ouple them with any 0 u.
tight end is actually the "split end" because speed is essential to
the overall execution of the pattern. The weakside receiver runs a
We run several base pa~er~~an ~hiS provides different 100\11 post pattern to keep the free safety in the middle. Against man
three types of bootleg bta~~fi~ittle o:;w learning for the offe~ (Qverage, the flanker must create a cushion on the corner. He may
for the defense but en al s break the pattern into a "sideline and up" if the corner plays too
simplicity is again a key. tight. This pattern is more effective on a hashmark to the wide side
Ii the field because this really stretches the defensive secondary.
an excellent zone pattern
. b tie pattern toward
The 4 pattern is the most baSIC 00 er~s to designate play for bootleg passes
strength. The QB calls the nu~ber ~:: the backfield actloR
action, and the play ~umber~ es~~ example would be The line play is the same against all defenses. The playside
the QB rolling opposite the ow. will use aggressive 8 call blocking. The plays ide tackle
(Diagram 11-1). ainst zone coverage. not allow his man to penetrate. The center blocks "man on,"
This is an excellent pattern ag If ·t is sky coverage and kicks out the defensive end. The offside guards' rule is
y lame as for the center. If the center and both guards are
reads the corner and strong safet · plto the tight end
d
corner covers the Sl·deI·me, he goes ee
 COACHING [)OOTLEG ACTION COACHING [)OOTLEG ACTION 213
212
" I " call is necessary-the center, playside running back must fill for pulling lineman
covered, a hel~ he p d II bl ck down, and the offside guard
tackle and playslde guar a 0 Both running backs are blockers first and receivers second on
pulls (Diagram 11·2). all 20 and 40 series bootlegs. The dive back's first responsibility is
to fill for the pulling lineman and pick up any linebacker blitzes. If
no blitz develops, he then breaks across about 5 yards deep, going
( c in the same direction as the QB. He is a secondary receiver and
-~ will be an outlet for the QB if he gets pressure. He must never get
C s deeper than 5 yards, because you want to hit him underneath the
s
linebacker drops. This also helps to influence the linebackers and
E keeps them from getting too much depth.
The offside back comes across hard and attacks the offside
defensive end. This is a critical block because you never want your
QB to get hit from the blind side. If the defensive end drops off, the
back will then swing upfield and may be a secondary receiver if the
QB is forced to scramble.

Diagram 11·2
.31342-Help Help Call
quarterback execution on bootleg passes
h QB will set up at 9 yards deep
On all bootleg passes t .e. we tried to make this a "run
behind the playsi~~ gu~rd. ~n~t~~~y;iming necessary for hitting the
first-pass second opt~on, u d can call a predetermined
d
pass made this impossIble. Inst~a y~e~sive end at home. This Is
the bootleg off the power action
If you are running the power series, the B56·57 action can
also be very effective. The QB comes off the line more on this
bootleg and some QBs feel that this is an easier play action fake
lor the passing game. They can set up quicker behind the playside
guard. A common mistake is for the QB to hurry his fake. This is
necessary if he is throwing a quick out, but if it is a deeper pattern,
he should get a good mesh with the back. You want the QB to

also a good actIOn for the

:0
bootleg run (B~2 run) to kQe: :cr:mble from if protection does
th I'nebackers are often drawn
open up to the back, but he must angle back toward the offside
guard. He extends the ball to the back, meshing behind the offslde
break down on the pass, because e I guard, and he then puts the ball on his hip and sprints to a depth
out of position. . n be seen in the lint of9 yards (see Diagram 11·3). He will set up at the same spot on all
Two of the different kinds of play achon ca . ts and fakes a IIootlegs so that there is consistency for the offensive linemen.
. 11 1 the QB reverse plVO B The 3 and 4 patterns are good from this play action, but the 5
two diagramS. In DIagram " . . ht In Diagram 11·2, the Q
23 dive, then bootlegs bac~ to hIS n~oo~le s to his left. The ba* is more consistent. On the 5 pattern, the flanker runs a fly
opens up and fakes a 42 dIve, th~n 3 gattern. Both tight the playside tight end runs a deep post. This clears the free
pattern off the weakside bootl~J I~.t~~ e! reads the corner for and the corner. The offside split end (he must have speed)
read the secondary. The piaysl e Ig a post but curls at across hard and fast on a drag pattern at a depth of about
h ff 'd t'ght en d runs yards. If he is open, the QB may throw quickly and hit him
flag or sideline. Teo Sl e I. h deep middle zone
yards if there is a free safety to t e the linebackers. If he does not get open, he breaks up into
11·2).
214 COACHING [)OOTLEG AalON COACHING [)OOTLEG AalON
215

18 YARDS
two other effective bootleg patterns

s '/ There are two other particularly good atter

ment the bootleg passing series The "OB23,r .. ns that comple-
I YARDS I s / all three receivers into a curl ro~t (D' or OB43 Curl It" put
E V 8 VI E 8 / reads the linebacker under cover: Jagdram 11-4). The QB simply
ge an goes to the open man.
6b~/
I 7
1/1
8 _-8--_
~d~
Diagram 11-3 E
51347 vs. Man Coverage, Cenrer Pulls vs. Even Defense

the funnel created by the tight end and flanker. The QB will hit him
at a depth of 18 to 20 yards. This is generally behind the
linebackers, and the only one who may be a problem is the strong
safety. The QB must be aware of the strong safety threat and
scramble if he gets back that deep. This pattern is excellent Diagram 11-4
against man coverage because the corner is always chasing a tight 01323, Curl Ir
end on a drag route. The strong safety and free safety would now
be cleared by the tight end post.
On the B56-57 action, the offside back blocks the near t
defensive end. The faking back carries out a great fake and thea
runs a swing pattern for a possible throwback. The one problem /
),s
with this play action is that you do not have a back to plug •
blitzing linebacker. The easiest way to handle this is not to use
play action against a team that employs a lot of stunts and E
The more they stunt, the more we use the 20 and 40 series
on all bootlegs.
Diagram 11-3 also shows the center pulling playside for
defensive end. This has been an effective blocking scheme
even defenses. If you do not have a center who is cap,abll
pulling, it is just as easy to have him block offside and
guard. Personnel will dictate the best blocking scheme for
particular team. Diagram 11-5
11322 Drag
216 COACHING [JOOTLEG ACTION

o th "1822 drag" (Diagram 11-5). the QB reads the .free

n e h should be an opening for the tight
safety. If he stays back. 1f ~:ecovers the drag. the flanker post will
end on the drag pattern. A run-conscious free safety may also
be a high percentage pas:~ .f he freezes on the fake. The drag
get beaten by this post pa ern I e ass whereas the flag or post
pattern should be a h~g~ ~~~Q~a~! al:o want to run a 1823 and
can be the homerun ak · The drag pattern now becomes a
roll toward We
throwback. thehave so foun d the 1 and 3 patterns to be very
flana ler.
effective against two-zone coverages.

why include bootleg passes with the veer?

This entire bootleg passing concept is only com PlemBentta ry-
Pressure the Defense
or . t I part of the veer package. u there
it is not a necessaryd m egra for a coach to include the bootleg
can be several goo reasonse First it is another effective way to
with Multiple Formations
series in his to~al veer ~~:;~e ·secon·d reason is that it puts a great
counter defenSive pursu~daries who like to use action zones which
deal of pressure o~ sec~h final reason would be if you are blessed
rotate on play actlO.n. ~ d you want to expand the passing
with a good throwmg Q. an tt ck can definitely put additional
game.
pressureTheonbt~~tl~~e~:~~;r~ ~n~ the secondary. and many veer
As we have already acknowledged. the tight formation is our
teams use them very effectively. basic formation. We plan to use this formation at least 50 percent
of the time. But we do not want to depend on only one formation
for several different reasons. It would be too easy for a team to
prepare for us if they only had to work against the tight formation
all week in practice. "Familiarity breeds good defense." and you
do not want anyone to be able to zero in on your basic offense. The
second reason for multiple formations is to spread the secondary
out and force them to Cover more of the field. The third considera-
tion is that we want several formations which force major defen-
sive adjustments as the opponent tries to match strength with
strength.

formations With two wide receivers

The easiest variations are to Simply employ two wide re-

,-"'~IS. We do this by splitting out the tight end (our split end)
from the flanker. which results in a pro formation (Diagram
 Pf\E5SUf\E THE DEFENSE WITH MULTIPLE FOI1MATIONS 219
PflESSUflE THE DEFENSE WITH MULTIPLE FOI1MATIONS
218
, S
TE C
SE
o OO~OOO FL
C BIB SS
o o EV HI VE
I
o 0 OOO~OO
o
Diagram 12-1
cp oFL SE
The Pro Formation 0 , 0
1) Th'IS f0 rces the wea k er to loosen up, and teams often I
12-. I d cornr The running and passmg. games
play the free sa~ety a litt eat :~r.;he running game toward the split Diagram 12-2
to strength don t change h . .de veer and lead option keeps Twins f\ight on Left H ashmarl~
. limited but t e mSI d ' h
en d IS more , 'f the shift their strength towar you~ bg t
teams honest. In fact, l Y e effectively toward the spltt end. These two formations may also be used often in your two
end, you may.be able to ~~~::ofit end has the advantage of single minute offense or if you get behind and have to play catch-up. An
The passmg game t p k with The best split end patterns overabundance of good wide receivers and a great throwing
coverage and a lot of a~a ~~t~: curl off play action to the strong quarterback would also be strong considerations for going to more
have been a throw~ac P II removes the linebacker under pro or twins formations.
side. The play actl~n g~~e~~ ~as to beat the corner one-on-one.
coverage and the spltt ~~ r yhas been effective with sprint·out
The 7- and 12-yard ~I e I~e The pro formation should be used incorporating on unbalanced attack
action t oward. the sPfltth e~ id so that the split end has more area with a minimum of new learning
more in the mIddle 0 t e e
in which to operate. One of the advantages of using a variety of formations is that
It forces the defense to make adjustments according to the
employing the twins formation strength of the offensive formation. By jumping into an unbal-
. b tt two wide-receiver formation anced line, you definitely put additional pressure on the defense. In
• The twins formation ~s atw~ ;;de re~eivers to the wide side of an unbalanced line, the offense has two linemen on one side .of the
when on a hashmark. HaVIng d linebackers to spread tenter and four on the other. Two additional blockers can make a
the field forces the defensive secondharytan er to help out with the big difference. We wanted to be able to utilize an unbalanced
ftmayevenceaov rei attack with a minimum of new learning.
out and the free sa e y 2) Th' kes it easier to run towa
Pass coverage (Diagram 12- d' h IS m~ g offense into the sideline The first consideration was to retain a split backfield align-
the short SIde 0 f thefieId , .an tight
. t e runntn
format IOn.
' The passing 0 fI_en II
_......
ment with our running backs so that execution would not suffer.
is the same as if you were 10 a . . atterns to the - We also wanted the blocking rules on the strong side to remain
is now capable of running ~ano~.~ ~~~s~~ne~:ellent. If the def~ Identical with those in the tight formation. The unbalanced
side and the quick post to t e sp I ften faced with a mism- formation was the net result (Diagram 12-3). The flanker was
elects to use man coverage, .the~ are °on our flanker. The fla' " up on the line of scrimmage and the split end was employed
because their strong safety IS altgned Y safety is generally IUn "up back" behind either the weakside or strongside guard.
'd . r and the strong , b--1. basic plays which we run .from this formation are the 42-43
is your best WI e receIve d odds in anyone 5 . . -
weakest pass defender. Those are goo
 PRESSURE THE DEFENSE WITH MULTIPLE FOIVvIATION5 PIIESSUIIE THE DEFENSE WITH MULTIPLE FOIVvIATIONS 221
220

oo~ooo oFL c s
00 TE
SE
o 0
Diagram 12-3
Unbalanced Righr

dive with an isolation block by the "up back," the 42-43 veer, and
the 46-47 veer.
On the 42-43 veer, the "up back" pulls out and leads for the
pitch so that we have two players blocking force. On the 46-47
veer, the "up back" kicks out the first defender outside our
offensive tackle (Diagram 12-4). This created the fastest hitting
power play in football, but the mesh and timing are still identical
to our regular outside veer from the tight formation. The quarter-
back still reads the defensive end. If he jams the "up back," the
quarterback keeps the ball and options the next defender. This
formation has been particularly effective in short yardage and goal
line situations when it is tougher for the defense to make major
adjustments.
s c
Diagram 12-5
Unbalanced Righr Morion Weal\-J9 Oprion
offense. Any play from unbalanced right, motion weak, is executed
and b1.ocked ju~t .like any play from pro formation. The only
exceptIOn to thiS IS that the tight end is no longer an eligible
receiver because the flanker is up on the line of scrimmage. The
passing game does have to be modified accordingly..
spreading the defense with backfield motion
A~other way to force a defensive adjustment is to put a back
In motion ~o that you end up in either a trips or spread formation.

t
c B B You can start out in tight right and then motion the offside back to
E V N the weak side (Diagram 12-6). We call the weakside back going

00~6
l1II!ak, "Wally:' .

~~i---
ooo~ooo
o 0
Diagram 12-4
~ 0
Ourside Veer from Unbalanced Righr Diagram 12-6
Tighr Righr-Wally
The best play away from the "up back" is for the QUi!rtl!rlMlil
to quickly fake a dive to the "up back" and then r~n theto A spr.ead formation means that there are two quick receivers
.. b k'" motion either dlv Side, and this forces the secondary to balance up. We will
option. You can also put t h e up ac m
strong side or away from strength (Diagram 12-5). T.hls es and counters up the middle, the lead option toward the
major adjustments by the defense with no new learnmg and the outside veer and crazy option toward the remain-
222 PRESSUf\E THE DEFENSE WITH MULTIPLE FOfWATIONS Pf\ESSUf\E THE DEFENSE WITH MULtiPLE FOfWATIONS
223
. b k Our passing attack will be primarily dropback, 14·15
mg ac.
action toward t h e remamm
.. g back , and 12.13 action away from
/
/
him.If the strongsl'd e bac k goes in motion weak, it. is called
tt k"Will." /
OO~OO V/
" . . ht Will" gives you a stronger runnmg a ac away
TlghthRI~ er b t a balanced passing attack (Diagram 12·7).
k
from t e an b , kUh been an excellent pass pattern using the
The 115 throw ac as
" ." .
Will motton..

ou f
. h
All of the ass patterns will remam t e same as I I
~h the motion back always running an
~er~}~;~ f~~;?~~~~ ;:quires virtually no new. lear~ing for th:
th d fense to make some major adjustments If
'f't

Diagram 12·8
7
--
offense, but orc~s oun e ~ in their pass coverage. Both "Wally" and Tight Right-Scm- 014 Stop
they are to remal.n sb . d more often in the middle of the field.
"Will" motion WI ll e use
These three types of backfield motion combine to put a great
deal of pressure on a defense. All three offensive sets change
around the strengths of both the running and passing games so
that the defense must make sound adjustments in a matter of
seconds. This forces your opponent to spend valuable practice
time working on something other than your basic veer attack. By
the same token, the offense runs only those plays where the timing
and execution are identical to those run from the basic tight
formation. With two tight ends, the blocking patterns also remain
the same. Very little practice time is required to have these three
variations ready each week in practice.
Diagram 12·7
Tight [>,ight-Will- 115 Throwbccl~ why multiple formations?
The backfield motion, together with the unbalanced forma.
motioning to a trips formation tion, pro and twins, all combine to create added pressure on the
defense. The key is being able to move people around without
The one other type of backfi eId mot'Ion employed. is referred to
t to the changing the execution for the backs or the blocking assignments
"s m" "Tight Right-Sam" puts three receivers ou kslde for the line. Do a few things and do them well. This is possible with
as a . Th' quires the wea
wide side of the field in a trips set. IS re . ram 12-8).
• Simplified version of multiple formations within the structure of
running back to go in motion toward the fl~l1k~rs!~:;h, and the the basic veer offense. A good dictum to follow is this: Anything
This unbalances the offense with ~ 7 to 4 ~a~I~~' ustment. Both tbl that is simple for the offense, but creates complexity for the
defense must correspondingly go mto a tr p J d the flanker .... defense, is worth considering as a part of your offensive package.
running and passing games are very strong towar unning attack "
the "014 stop" is the basic pa~s pattern. The r nin back
identical to "Wally" motion smce the same run g
stationary.

13
Preparing the
Veer Quarterback
If a quarterback is ~oing to ~al~~i:~~n:::~~~~:e;'u~~ Ii~:t~:
able to analyze defensIve stbre gtkto be able to audible to a better
. t our quarter ac
earher, we expec. . demands it. We also explained how we
play when the slt~atlon h and attempt to attack the carre-
number off defenslve( streCngth t r 2) Several other simple keys
ding weakness see ap e .
:;:~; help the quarterback in his play selection.
keying the free safety in a seven-man front
Ii ke is always the free safety. If
In analyzing a defense, the rst ) Y . t the tight formation.
it is a seven-man front (52, 61, etc. agams center When he Is
. II r ed on or near our . . to
the free safety IS usua Ya Ign. r e is reading or slanltng
on the center and the defensIve ~ f r running attack aWllll
strength, our plan is to direct muc 0 ou more to strength. The
from strength. If the line slants w~ak, ;e gomonster zone or a foUl"
secondary will generally be in a tree- eep
deep man coverage with a .free safe~t ver to the weak side.
When the free safety IS cheate 0
PREPARING THEVEm QUARTm[)ACI~
225
secondary is usually in a four-deep action zone or in a two zone
with both corners up. These are both balanced secondaries and we
would expect the defensive line to slant more toward our flanker. If
they are slanting strong, we use a balanced running attack. If they
are in a read defense, we go more toward strength, since they have
not compensated for our flanker.
One other obvious key is when the free safety cheats over
toward our tight end just before the snap. When this happens with
a seven-man front, you can expect either a strong safety blitz or
two-strong zone. In either case, we generally want to audible to a
play away from our flanker because both defenses are very
unbalanced to strength. With a safety blitz, the secondary gener-
ally plays 31 man with no free safety help (Diagram 13-1). If you
can break a run up the middle or weak, it could be a big play.
c
I
I
I
I
o
Diagram 13-1
Ol~ ie Strong Safety Glitz-01 Man Secondory
Ihe free safety key in an eight-man front
The free safety key in the traditional balanced eight -man front
(62,44 stack, split 4 or 6, 71, 53, gap 8, etc.) is even easier to read.
The secondary is now three-deep with four defenders on the line on
tither side of our center. If the free safety a lignment is on our
center, we mainly go toward the flanker since the defense is
balanced. This is usually a three-deep zone, and the sideline to the
lanker is generally wide open.
If the free safety shifts over toward our tight end on the
side, we can expect three different kinds of secondary
The most common secondary would now be three-deep man
"",,!ra!le with no free safety. If the safety is up fairly tight, you can
 P[\EPA[\ING THE VEE[>, QUA[\TE[>,I)ACI~ 225

secondary is usually in a four-deep action zone or in a two zone

with both corners up. These are both balanced secondaries and we
would expect the defensive line to slant more toward our flanker. If
they are slanting strong. we use a balanced running attack. If they
are in a read defense. we go more toward strength, since they have
not compensated for our flanker.
One other obvious key is when the free safety cheats over
toward our tight end just before the snap. When this happens with
a seven-man front. you can expect either a strong safety blitz or
two-strong zone. In either case. we generally want to audible to a
play away from our flanker because both defenses are very
unbalanced to strength. With a safety blitz. the secondary gener-
ally plays 31 man with no free safety help (Diagram 13-1). If you
Preparing the can break a run up the middle or weak. it could be a big play.

Veer Quarterback c, \ B B
7
I
c
I
E \ V N V EI ss I
I
Q0\0 o@ 0/0/0/ I

. . t call his own plays. he must first be

If a quarterback IS ~omg 0 hs and weaknesses. As noted
able to analyze defensIve st~enr to be able to audible to a better
earlier. we expe~ our .qua~te::~ds it. We also explained how we
play when the slt~atlon e h and attempt to attack the corre-
number off defensIve streCngth t 2) Several other simple keys
d' g weakness (see ap er .
~~~ ~~IP the quarterback in his play selection.
. even-man front
keying the free safety In a s
. ke is always the free safety. H
In analyzing a defense. the first) y . t the tight formation.
it is a seven-man front (52. 61. etc. agam: ur center. When he II
the free safety is usually aligned on I~r n~a\eading or slanting to
on the center and the d~fensiveuc~:/~ur running attack aVIIII
strength. our plan is to dtrect m k go more to strength. TIll
from strength. If the line sla~ts ~~a '-~:ep monster zone or a
secondary will generally be m a ree
deep man coverage with a .free sa~e~t over to the weak side.
When the free safety IS ch ea e
o 0
o
Diagram 1:3-1
Ollie Strong Safety [llitz-J1 Man Secondary
the free safety key in on eight-man front
The free safety key in the traditional balanced eight-man front
(62.44 stack. split 4 or 6. 71. 53. gap 8. etc.) is even easier to read.
The secondary is now three-deep with four defenders on the line on
side of our center. If the free safety alignment is on our
we mainly go toward the flanker since the defense is
~alRced. This is usually a three-deep zone. and the sideline to the
is generally wide open.
If the free safety shifts over toward our tight end on the
Side. we can expect three different kinds of secondary
The most common secondary would now be three-deep man
with no free safety. If the safety is up fairly tight. you can
226 PI\EPAI\ING THE VEEI'. QUAI\TEI'.OACK PIIEPAIIING THE VEEI'. QUAI\TEI'.OACK
227
almost be sure it is man. When this happens, we expect stunting
and penetrating defenses and try to get off-tackle or outside as
quickly as possible (Diagram 13-2). We also know that they have to
cover our backs man-to-man with their linebackers, and this is a
mismatch. A deep pattern to a back would be a good aUdible. as
would a post over the middle by the flanker, since there is no free
safety help. Our running attack would be directed more away from
the flanker, since the defense is unbalanced to strength.

C FS c
\8 8 8 8 1 I
\ E\ V\ f< / EI I Diagram 13-3

o ~/ol~Ic~d 0 I 646 in Side Pocket vs. Split 6 2 St

'
Z
rang one Secondary
\ 0
b
/
0/
6 play selection when they shl·ft a I'
.
In a seven-man front
In em an over

Diagram 13-2 Another common way for th d f

Eight-Man Front 44 Stacl~-31 Man Secondary l3litz by Inside llls strength is to shift either Iinem e I~ e~se to adjust toward flanker
common way to do this from ~~e I~e .ackers, or ~oth. The most
noseguard to strength and close the kle d.efense IS to move the
guard (Diagram 13-4). This puts the dw:aksl~e tackle down on the
attack an eight-man front with the free safety defense with a stack on the guards ~~nse I~ an unbalanced split
cheated over to strength quarterback to attack at th . en thiS occurs, we tell our
from strength), particularly itt~ncfovere~ ta~kl~ (generally away
When the free safety shifts over but lines up 10 to 12 yards off e ree safety IS In the middle.
the ball, it is usually "two-strong zone." The safety and weak
corner now each cover one-half of the field, and the corner will ba c s
c
in a hard cloud rotation. The corner support makes it tough to run 8 8 S
wide toward the flanker, so it is better to go weak. The best pall E V N V E
pattern is 646, hitting the flanker on a quick fly pattern in the side
pocket (Diagram 13-3). This is an easy pass to complete and It II 00()~0()0
always open against two-strong zone. o
The only other coverage the defense may be in with a shlftlll
free safety is a concealed three-deep zone. Some teams move o 0 o
safety over simply to confuse the offense and then drop
straight back in normal three-deep zone coverage. We would Diagram 13-4
use a more balanced running attack and attempt to hit Okie Over Defense, 3-Deep Zone Secondary
passes in the middle and the weak half of the field away We do the same thing if the h k
flanker. The sideline to the flanker is again wide open. guard-center gap Th k y c e~ the noseguard over into
. e ey now IS to audible away from the
 PI"\EPAI"\ING THE VEEI"\ QUARTEI"\[lACK Pl"\tPAl"\lNG THE VEEI"\ QUARTEI'JlACK 229
228
. h f d fensive tackle is inevitably checked in of interceptions. We have been fortunate enough to break a
noseguard, slOce tear . e oming on a hard slant to the inside number of long runs on veers and options when the defense was
the guard-tackle gap or IS C i t 'd looking for the pass. Secondary run support is always slow in these
. Th t kl has an easy block on any P ay ou Sl e
(Diagram 13-5). led ahc e orne big plays here. Counter action situations. There is one other big advantage: After running the ball
·
h 1m, nd we shou ave s '11 b several times in passing situations, the defense cannot afford to
a. h t thO defense since the linebackers WI e on a
plays wIll also ur IS , just drop off and play only for the pass, so when you do throw, your
fast-flow key. chances of a completion greatly improve.

c make up a play list for down and distance situations

s for each game
After analyzing our offense, we make up a play chart accord-
ing to down and distance plays. We list our favorite passes and runs
for first and 10 or running down situations, for third and short, for
third and 5, and plays for long yardage situations. Then we pick
the best plays for each of these situations against each opponent
Diagram 13-5 according to their known tendencies. As an example, if they
I 46 Veer Away from Noseguard CG Call)
\\1 consistently use a two-deep zone in long yardage situations, our
Ol~ie Check 5toC k weo \
best plays against it will be listed. We keep the list shqrt so that it
· I for the quarterback to follow handles may be easily memorized by the quarterback. It is also printed on
The ot h er b aSlc ru e f t H . Iy
h h·ft d defenses from a seven-man ron. e sImp a sheet that is kept on clipboards by the head coach and the
most ot er s Ie . h are in a four-deep secondary and have spotter in the box. Do not rely on your memory in a key situation.
counts people, and If t ~J of the center that is where we want to The excitement of the game can cause too many distractions, and
just three men on one Sl e '
one poorly selected play in a critical situation can lose the ball
go.
game. Have a plan for everything! Write it down and be sure to
implement it exactly as you envisioned it.
down and distance considerations
. down and distance is another develop a sideline notebook
Play selection accord 109 to b k The first major
. . f the veer quarter ac .
prime consIderatIOn or . ft running downs and run There will usually be other adjustments to be made during the
. . h t '11 pass qUIte 0 en on
premIse IS t a you WI f thO 's that a defense can game when your opponent has changed his plan of attack. When
. d The reason or IS I rt
more on passlOg owns. . with reat run suppo this occurs, your spotter on top must be alert enough to pick up
effectively stop the outside runn~ng ga~: you s;ereotype yourself the changes. We have a sideline notebook prepared for this
by a secondary selling out on t e run.. . the defense can Situation. In the notebook we have a sheet listing every con-
and run the ball consistentl~ in running s~~~~:~~e ball when they ceivable defense or defensive adjustment, and our best plays and
gamble and your offense will bog down. . arne will improve blocking patterns are identified accordingly. This notebook is
·
are expect 109 the run and the runmng g
revised each summer by the entire offensive staff. It has eliminated
immensely. I ass in long yardage lIIany staff arguments during the regular season because we have
By the same token, if you a way~ P entag e and a lot all agreed on our basic game plan ahead of time.
I completIOn perc
situations, you can expect a ow
230 PI\EPAr\ING THE VEEI\ QUAI\TEI\[)ACK PI\EPAI\ING THE VEEI\ QUAmEl\[)ACI~ 231

The head coach, line coach and spotter each have a copy of
the sideline notebook with them during the game. When some. c c
thing occurs that was unexpected, we don't have to "grab bag"_
we open the book and attack the defensive adjustment according
to a well·conceived plan. This notebook has proven to be an
invaluable aid in getting us out of some tight situations. It is also
an excellent teaching tool for an experienced quarterback.

using the hashmark to your advantage Diagram 13·6

28 Crazy Option to Wide Side, 4 Ca li on Noseguard and Trap on
The alignment of the ball on a hashmark is another variable Defensive Tacille
that will affect play selection. The majority of plays in each game
are started from a hashmark and most big plays will occur to the
wide side; therefore, most defenses will put strength into the wide S 8 YARDS f
I

~oo y//
J
side. The most common defensive adjustment when our flanker is C 7 YARDS
to the wide side is to slant the line to grass (to the wide side). Our SS '/
quarterback must therefore know what plays we want to run /'
toward a slant tackle with a minimum of running room on the ~OO /'
outside. We have these listed accordingly: 46·47 G dive; 46·47 veer
(G call); 38·39 option (G or 44 call).
We also list the plays that are better to the wide side. On the
wide side, we want to be able to get to the pitch on all options and
veers, because the back has ample room to cut and operate. The
Diagram 13·7
problem to the wide side arises in getting out to the defensive end
414 Out vs. Mo nster Zone
for the option. The tackle generally plays in a strong outside read
or loops out, and our tackle cannot handle him. The slanting safety, and he hits either the "out" to the flanker or the "seam" to
noseguard also causes problems. The best running plays, there- the tight end. This pass is virtually impossible to cover from a
fore, are those which double team down on the noseguard and hashmark because the zone strong safety has too far to go. The
then either read or trap the defensive tackle. The three plays that same pass from the middle of the field has been ineffective
do this most effectively are the 24·25 trap, the 42·43 veer, and the because now he does have time to hang in the "seam" and still get
28.29 crazy option (Diagram 13·6). The tackle does not have to under the "out." To make them sound, you should analyze every
hook the defensive tackle, and this increases your chances of pass pattern you throw according to the hashmark criteria. It can
isolating the defensive end for the pitch or keep. . make a big difference.
Breaking down your passing attack accordmg to the
hashmark is also important. We have several patterns that we only
throw from the middle of the field and others that we only throw field pOSition zones and analysis
from a hashmark. The reason for this is simply to increase their
chances of success. Some pass patterns work only if you ~a~ The football field itself can be divided into a number of
enough room to spread out the defenders. An example of thiS unmarked zones which can also affect play selection (Diagram
"414 out" (Diagram 13·7). The quarterback must key the strong 13·8). We examine each zone moving out from our own end zone
 G
Pfl.EPAfl.ING THE VEEr>. QUAmEr>.[)ACK Pfl.EPAfl.ING THE VEEr>. QUAfl.TEr>.[)ACI~ 233
2J2
- FIELD POSITION ZONES - fairly conservative but do what you have to do to get two
consecutive first downs. If you get the ball to the 30, your punter
OPPONENTS END ZONE
GOAL
can come in, if necessary, and easily put the ball across your
~MuS{ SCORE ~'J1AI, opponent's 40. This will give your defense the upper hand, because
10 60 yards requires a long sustained drive and your defense will
FOUR DOWN
2D never let that happen. Field position means everything to the
ZONE defense and you will give up very few touchdowns if you do not put
30
35 their backs up against the wall.
4D WIDE OPEN
50 YD. ~k-i-++++++t+rH
LINE
ZONE the wide open zone
4D
II From your 30 yard line to the opponent's 35, there is a stretch
30
GET THE FIRST of territory that is full of fun and excitement. This is the "wide open
20 zone," where you go for the big play. This is when you run reverses,
DOWN ZONE
10 throw deep passes, get the pitch out on the veers, and generally
MUST GiT' DUT~d~~ open up the offense. "Third and 1" even becomes a passing down.
GOAL
YOUR END ZONE You can play carefree football because, if you do not make the first
down, your punter will come in and drive the ball deep into their
Diagram 13-8 territory-four plays later you will get the ball back.
Fifty to 70 yards is a long way to go on a sustained drive
ntil we ultimately reach our opponent's end zone for the score. without the big play. Too many things can go wrong (a penalty, a
~he first zone is the "must get out zone:' It extends from our own missed assignment, etc.) so your quarterback will be a river boat
goal line out to the 10 yard line. It is one ofthe smallest zone~, but gambler and go for the big play that will break the game open or
none is more critical. Play selection for the quarterback Will be put it on ice.
"bread and butter," and we cannot afford any error~, such as
fumbles or missed assignments. A mistake here results In a safety the four down zone
or touchdown for our opponent. We "must get out" a~d not beat
ourselves. The opponent often gambles with a penetrating defense After you cross the opponent's 35 yard line, you can almost
to force the big mistake. We usually begin with a quar.terback smell the goal. You will not punt the ball when you're inside this
sneak if inside our 3 yard line. Any other plays selected Will be. as zone, so you can kick a field goal or use all four downs to get"the
safe as possible, and will include plays that can ~urt penetratn~ first down. Your offense knows that you can average at least 2Y2
defenses We may make a big play with an outSide veer or eha yards per attempt and you are going to score. Crank them up in
l
option if .we desperately need a score. Let your t earn knowthatt
. to etI the huddle-emotion ' and execution will win it for you from this
zone is a test of character and guts, and that you are gOing g pOint on.
the ball out across the 10. You will be more conservative once again. Run the basic veer
offense and go with the plays that have been good to you. The one
thing you cannot allow is a turnover or a major penalty-this is
get the first down zone YOur big chance to score and you will make it happen. Throw a
". h d zone coming out. life pass to loosen them up, and if it is incomplete you still have
The "get the first down zone IS t e secon. . 'ck StaP
You have more breathing room here but the air IS stili stl y. three downs for the first. Make it happen!
234 PREPARING THE VEER QUARTERllACK PREPARING THE VEER QUARTERllACK
235
the must score zone the ball has been spotted. We always kick the ball, even in the
fourth and short, if we are behind by 1. 2, 8, 9 or 10 pOints, or if we
The "must score zone" is just what it says-when Y?~'re are ahead by 4 or more points. (I do reserve the right to go for it if
inside the 10, you must score! This is th~ oth~l; s":tall but cnt~~al it is fourth and 1 or less.) Any other score means that we may go
d your proficiency at this pomt WI 0 en mean e
~?;:;e:~e between winning and losing. Attitude, more than any- for it on fourth and short or we may use a fake field goal. You may
not agree exactly with our point choices but the important thing is
I
t hi.mg ese, . what counts. The adrenalin
IS dbof 'all'bl11 tplayers is to make your decision ahead of time. During the heat of the game,
.
pumpmg ar an h d d the excitement shoul ffe VISI e d 0h anyone
th it is easy to make a hasty decision that ultimately spells defeat.
t h' g the game Go into your goal line 0 ense an ave e
wa c mbac k comm u· nicate to everyone in the huddle that it is "all
quarter
when to take a safety
on the line." h b' I
Our goal line offense is dependent upon tree aSlc p ays-
the OUtSI'd e veer, the lead option and the quarterback
. sneak.
. bThe When are you going to take an intentional safety? It's late in
the game and you are stuck with fourth and 8 on your own 3 yard
snea k WI'11 keep them honest inside.. The. outside dveer h IS our
d dest .
ff t kl The lead option hits qUickly aroun teen an IS line. Our rule is that we will always take the safety if we are behind
play 0 - a c ';~hey
a great p lay I
load up in the middle. We will practice blocking
bl I (' d f h
by 4 points; ahead by 5, 6, 12 or 13 points (especially when it is late
these three plays against every con~eiv.a e goa . me e e~se eac in the game, bad weather, or low scoring); and maybe when we're
day in practice. Execution at this pomt IS everythmg. We Will thro.w ahead by 3, 4 or 11 points late in the game (be very careful if they
· pass at times to keep the secondary honest. We Will
a pIay a ct Ion have a good field goal kicker). We have decided not to take a safety
score! when we are ahead by 7 points late in the game, because even if
they block the punt and score, most coaches will go for 2 points
and the odds are against them making it. If we think that the
play selection accor~i~g to score coach will take a tie, then we take the safety. The important point
and time remaining once again is to have it planned out ahead of time, write it down,
and stick to it.
Two of the most obvious considerations in pl~y. selection are Another decision that should be written down is when to go
th e of the game and the amount of time remammg. Everyone for 2 points after a touchdown. We will go for 2 points when we are
w:n~~~~ be able to stay with their basic game plan ~ntil th~ :~: behind by 8 or 15 points, or ahead by I, 5 or 12 points.
and time dictate otherwise. But when you are behmd an d
play "catch-up," you will obviously have to open up the attack an attacking a reading defense
throw the ball. . , . time and
Several critical decisions regardmg the remal~mYd kick A team's defensive philosophy and tendencies will also affect
the score are sometimes taken for granted. When; ou fiYr~ oal play selection. Many teams believe that it is better to play a
a field goal? When to intentionally take a safety. Thbe .e rulge to conservative reading defense that stresses maximum pursuit. They
decision is much easier, but we h ave wn'tten . down
Ie ona hisaSlc
clipboard will sometimes penetrate in short yardage or paSSing Situations,
h th
follow during the game. The spotter as IS. ru the confusion of a but otherWise they seldom stunt or blitz. Against such an oppo-
since we do not want to rely on ~emory d~~?gk is realistic for our nent, we run more counter and reverse action to slow down their
game First, we write down the distance we m .th the wind. If pursuit. Bootleg and throwback passes are also more effective and
kicke;, going in either direction-into the, wi?d ~ ~~e stated area- we try to establish more of an inside running game. Bigger line
it is fourth and long, we will kick when.we r~ mSI e yard line where splits may help spread them out, and it is easier to establish ball
We always subtract 17 yards to determme t e exact Control but more difficult to break the long run or pass.
236 Pr\EPAr\ING THE VEEr>. QUAr\TEr>.OACK
play selection against penetrating defenses
Some teams love to gamble on defense. They will stunt, blitz
and attack with a penetrating style of defensive play that is
designed to confuse and discourage their opponents. The quarter-
back and his ten cohorts must now remain patient and work for
the big play. Ball control becomes very difficult because they will
often stunt into your play. Audibles will help pick at their weak-
nesses. You have to remember that great pursuit is impossible
when they penetrate, and when you break a play it has a great
chance of going all the way.
You want to hit quickly and run very little counter action.
Penetrating linemen and linebackers are not going to read counter
flow. The veers are now your best plays because you can block
down and seal off the inside. You must cut down the line splits, stop
all penetration, and get off-tackle or wide just as quickly as
possible. The lead option is the other great play because it gets
around the end so fast. Either throw quick passes or keep in all but
one or two receivers for maximum pass protection, and go for the
bomb. Expect more man-to-man secondary coverage and select
pass patterns accordingly. Use the hot receiver principle to burn
them when they stunt linebackers. A couple of long runs or passes
will help to settle them down.
will the weather affect the game plan?
The final factor that often affects play selection is the weather.
Several thoughts regarding this very tangible foe may be applica-
ble. First, if the weather is bad, you can basically ignore it. The
player who doesn't worry about it will generally perf?rm much
better-it does rain on both teams! Our game plan Will be more
conservative under very adverse conditions, and we will win with
field position and defense. But we can and will throw the ball in the
mud and rain as long as the ball can be kept dry. It is tougher for
the secondary to keep their feet, and one slip can mean a
touchdown. If the receiver falls down, it's just an incomplete pass.
The wind is the one factor that can have a more harmful effect
on one team than on the other. The passing team is obviously at.a
d isadvantage and this is one reason why it is difficult to wm
,
conSistently with the pass alone. Getting the wind in t hfitor
e rs
Pr\EPAr\ING THE VEEr>. QUAr\TEr>.OACK'
237
third quarter can also make a big difference and th I k f
com. t oss h as won or lost many a game The' one thoe uc 0 the
con t ro I'IS t h e number of plays you execute
. during a mg
ga yoU hcan
' . 'hh mew en
you re gomg wit t e wind. The quarterback and the entire team
must hustle as hard as Possible to and from the huddl h
you h ave t h e ball. Use more quick
' snap counts Get e,. w enever
I'b . m as many
pays as POSSI Ie. Conversely, when you're going into the wind, you
want your quarterback to slow it down. Take your time and use up
as much of the clock as POssible-this is when you want ball
control offense. Keep ~he ball in bounds and the clock running.
The ~ther fact~r IS to punt with the wind whenever POSSible,
e~en on first down If the quarter is ending. When gOing into the
wmd, you also want to use up the remaining time on the clock just
before the quarter ends, by running the ball and staying I'n b d
'f 'bl" oun s
~ POSSI ~. I ou m~y also be able to force your opponent to punt
mto the wmd by usmg one or two timeouts. It is up to the spotter to
keep you posted on .this and you must relay the proper information
to the players. Remmd each other on a Windy day to be alert a th
first. and third quarters come to an end-the alumni foo:ba~
genIUses hate to see you mess up this one. '
no one ever said it would be easy
. The poor quarterback-he is the hero if you win and the goat
If you lose. The coach may never be the hero, but the role of the
goat seems to come naturally. There never was a coach or a
qu~rterback who called a perfect game. There are just too many
v~nables to affect the outcome. They can both sleep well after a
vI~ory and they can both blame themselves for a hundred
~~stakes after a loss. It's the nature of the game-thank goodness,
;t IS a gam~! All you can do is have a plan for everything, try to
mplement It whenever possible, keep your head up at all times
and learn to live with human errors-both your own and those of
~hers. Coachi?g is the ~ost rewarding profession in the world as
ng as you thnve on excitement, love kids, and have decided that
you can't live without it.
 TEACHING THE VEEI\ OFFENSE WITH EFFECTIVE DRILLS 239

first, a coach or manager can play the defensive end and make the
read easy for the QB so that he can develop confidence and
experience success. Later on, we bring the defensive ends over and
let them vary their techniques and responsibilities to give our QBs
a tougher time for reading. We run our four basic plays for five
minutes each: inside veer, outside veer, counter option and lead
option. All offensive backs are in the drill and run as many plays as
possible with a new unit each time. This is also a great conditioner
if you push them hard enough. Execution in an option-type offense
is everything. We believe that repetition is the key to success. This
is also a great drill for teaching the defensive end how to defend
the option. At times, we also bring our corners over and let the
QBs option downfield on them.
Teaching the Veer Offense As a change-up in the veer drill, you can break it down further.
Using one line of dive backs, have your QB and dive back work on
with Effective Drills their mesh. Your QB will mix up giving to the dive back and
keeping the ball himself. The dive back does not know whether the
QB will give or keep. By using just one line of dive backs and
rotating three QBs, this drill is excellent for getting repetitions on
the mesh. Obviously, you can work on both the inside veer and the
outside veer.
We use the same idea to allow our QBs to work on the pitch.
Again, we have one line of pitch backs, and three QBs rotate. The
. ffense repetition is an important key to good play that best allows us to work on the pitch with no dive back is
With any o. . ' b t attained in small group drills. Your the lead option.
execut'Ion. Repetitions are '1 esb k into three groups and work on The next drill we run is the option drill. We run the option drill
offensive coaches can easl y rea
appropriate drills. at least twice every week for 20 minutes. This is a drill involving
the QBs, running backs, tight ends and flankers going against the
defensive ends and secondary. It is one of the best drills we have for
backfield drills teaching and polishing the skills needed to execute an option
Our basic drill for the backs is ~ne we c.all t(~. vge;~~r~!._~e
offense. You can set the defense in any alignment you want to
arked with the Ime spacmg la defend the option. You can run all of your basic running and
use a canva S mat m passing plays in this drill. We also let the defense mix up their
coverages of the option so that we can read different looks_
An important consideration in this drill is ball placement.
Make sure you run from the different hashmarks.
Diagram 14-1 .
Canvas Mot with Hole Numbers and Proper Spacing
offensive line drills
. ractice. We never
We run the veer drill for 20 mmute~ every P t d "II we run in There are a variety of techniques that your linemen must
miss one day of it. Th~s is the md O~\";"y~~r::~din~1 his keys. At execute. Proper drills give them the repetitions they need_
developing a QB's confidence an a I I
 4
240 TEACHING THE VEER OFFENSE WITH EFFEGIVE D(1,ILLS
A basic technique for any lineman is a straight-ahead face
block. With rule changes at the high school level, this is the
shoulder block. At the college level, initial contact can still be
made with the head so, consequently, we teach the face block. We
have broken the face block into three phases:
1. Approach
a. Lunge off the up foot and fire out with the rear foot.
b. Keep feet as wide as the shoulders and pointed straight
ahead.
c. Bull your neck and aim the face mask for the de-
fender's numerals.
d. Initial movement is forward and not up.
e. Whenever the defender is aligned on any part of your
body, fire out with your back foot. If you are not
covered, then lead with the foot nearer to the man you
will block.
f. When blocking a stunting lineman, take a shorter first
step.
2. Contact
a. At the moment of contact, snap the arms into your
opponent's solar plexus with a lifting action. On con-
tact, the body starts a lifting action which causes the
hips to sink further and adds leg power.
b. Never have the hands ahead of the forearms.
c. Keep the feet moving after contact.
d. Take the defender in the direction he wants to go.
Maintain contact.
3. Follow-through
a . Second effort is what counts.
b. If you start to lose the man, go to all fours and
scramble.
Our teaching progression for the face block begins with the
follow-through stage. The linemen work in pairs, with one partner
holding a hand dummy. The blocker starts with what we call a
good fit-face in the numbers, feet shoulders-width apar:t, and
hips sunk. On command, the offensive man accelerates hIs feet,
TEAO-:ING THE VEER OFFENSE WITH EFFEGIVE D(1,ILLS 241
moving the defender back until the whistle blows. We want our
linemen to know what a good fit and follow-through are like.
The next step is the approach and contact stage. We just want
a good explosion into the dummy and no follow-through. The
linemen simply concentrate on a good approach and contact.
In the third stage of our progression, the linemen execute a
complete block-approach, contact, follow-through. An invalu-
able teaching station for your linemen is a chute. This is a metal
structure with any number of individual 4 x 4 x 4 stalls (Diagram
14-2).
•
I I I I I Diagram 14-2
A 4-Mon Chute
To help your linemen maintain their base, each chute should
have 10-foot 2 x 12 boards with beveled sides. The chutes will get
your linemen into the habit of firing out instead of up.
Start with your linemen exploding through the chute from
their three-point stance. Next, have another player hold a hand
dummy on the other side of the chute. To simulate blocking a
defender head-up on your linemen, have them move into the chute
and then block the hand dummy on cadence.
While the face block or shoulder block is the starting point for
your offensive linemen, they must qUickly master other techniques
as well. A critical block for any option team is the scoop block.
In teaching the s~oop block, we also start with hand dum-
mies. The linemen work in pairs with two pairs going at once. You
want to pair right guards with right tackles, left guards with left
tackles, and guards with centers. Opposite the offense are the
appropriate defenders-one down defender and one linebacker
(Diagram 14-3).
In this drill, we concentrate on footwork. A 45 degree step is
taken with the lead foot and the blocker gets square to the goal
line with the second step.
The inside blocker will block the slant tackle by aiming for the
outside hip and working his hips around. If the down defender does
 • J
242 TEACHING THE VEEI'. OFFENSE WITH EFFEGIVE OI\ILLS
Diagram 14-3
Teaching Scoop [lIociling
not slant, he then continues and blocks the linebacker. The initial
lead step should put your uncovered lineman (no down defender
aligned on him) in position to cut off the linebacker. Your outside
man, who has a down defender aligned on him, will take the same
45 degree step and block area. If the defensive man slants inside
he will get square to the goal line on his second step and block the
linebacker.
In executing this block, the biggest problem is that the
linemen make contact with their heads and, unless they work their
hips around, the defensive men simply run through their heads.
Your linemen must accelerate their feet upon contact and work the
hips around. Our linemen spend a lot of time on this drill before
going live. By working them against the hand dummies, we instill
good habits and build confidence.
Another block that your guards must master is the outside
fold block. Guards use a fold block when they switch assignments
with the tackle. When the guard is using a fold block, your tackle
will usually be blocking down. In this drill, we pair up the
appropriate guards with their tackles. We go with two pairs at a
time against hand dummies (Diagram 14-4).
Diagram 14-4
Fold Oloclling Drill
As in the previous drill, the emphasis is on proper footwork.
Your tackle has to take a good lead step with his inside foot and
use an aggressive face or shoulder block on the down de~ender.
The guard steps with his outside foot replacing the tackle s lead
TEACHING THE VEEI'. OFFENSE WITH EFFEGIVE OI\ILLS
243
s~ep. He must not step back with this initial step since this wastes
time. As the guard steps, he wants to slap the tackle's butt with h'
outside hand (right guard slaps with right hand). This forces yo~:
guard to get his shoulders square as he goes to block th
linebacker. It is important to have the shoulders square for an all~
out .hit on the linebacker. Proper footwork eliminates wasted
mohon and gets the guard up the hole qUickly. To help your guard
get to the linebacker as quickly as possible, have your tackle cheat
up on the line of scrimmage while your guard cheats back.
Your tackles must also learn an inside fold block. The guard
steps with his outside foot and uses an aggressive face block on
the down defender. The tackle steps with his inside foot replacing
the guard's step. To get his shoulders square, your tackle should
slap the butt of the guard with his inside hand (Diagram 14-5). The
final drill, which has the guard and tackle working together, is a
combo blocking drill. A combo block is used by two linemen to
seal a down defender and linebacker (Diagram 14-6).
B
~
Diagram 14-5
Tacll le's Inside Fo ld Olocll
B
Diagram 14-6
Com bo Oloclling Drill
Your inside lineman, the guard, has to fire out, executing an
aggressive face block on the down defender. /tis important to keep
the feet moving with short, choppy steps. Do not let your guard
take a long initial step. The outside blocker steps with his inside
leg and keys the down defender's outside foot. If the defensive man
sl~nts out, then your tackle locks on and you get a double team on
this defender. If the defender is in a read technique or slanting to
the inside, your tackle must get upfield with his second step and
244 TEACHING THE VEEI', OFFENSE WITH EFFECTIVE DRILLS TEACHING THE VEEI', OFFENSE WITH EFFECTIVE DRILLS
245
block the linebacker. As in the other drills, we start with hand
Your tight end's basic technique is a veer release block. This is
dummies and progress to live defenders. In all the drills, your a blo~k used on the secondary man responsible for run support on
offensive line coach stands behind the offense so that he is able to the pitch. On the side ofthe flanker, the tight end has to read sky
direct the defenders as to which way they must slant. or cloud coverage. In sky coverage, your end blocks the strong
safety. When the secondary is playing cloud, he will blo k th
corner. c e
receiver drills
. The m~st important coaching point on the veer release block
Our receivers naturally spend a lot of time on catching drills. IS to ge~ width and not depth. The temptation is for your end to
But, with an option offense, your receivers are also very important turn upfield t?O soon. When he does this, he is getting too far in
as blockers. The wide receiver's basic technique is the stalk block. front of the pitch back and is forced to throw his block too
For the tight end, it is the veer release block. The most effective op,:m field blocks are executed 3 to 5 ~~~;~
Just as the face or shoulder block is the starting point for our ahe~d of the ball carner. The end has to release wide, keeping
linemen, it is also where we begin with the receivers. The teaching outside leverage on the force man.
progression is the same. [n teaching the face block, the ingredients In the actual execution of the block, have your end aim his
of successful blocking are stressed-contact, foot acceleration, face .mask for the outside armpit of the man he is blocking. After
good base and follow-through. makmg contac.t, the end has to get a good base and lock on to the
The wide receivers next work on their stalk block. The fi rst ~efende~. As m any block, quick acceleration of the feet is
coaching pOint is the one that is the most difficult to sell and may ImperatIVe.
be the most important part of the block. Your wide receiver must After working on their individual techniques, your flankers
come off hard with an outside release. He has to start as if running and ends should come together and work against two secondary
a fly pattern and explode off the line. [n sky or man coverage, the people-the strong safety and the strong corner. The secondary
corner will be forced to retreat. Your receiver keys the corner. people ca~ mix up sky and cloud coverage, forcing your receivers
When the corner reads the playas run he must break down before to recogJ1lze the coverage and block the appropriate defenders.
he can react up. As the corner breaks down, your flanker must
break down and mirror the corner. This is the other critical
coaching point: "Stop when he stops." Now he should shuffle back
toward the line of scrimmage as the corner comes to attack the
ball carrier. Your receiver should wait and throw his block as late
as possible.
The block itself is a mirror block. As the corner gets close,
your flanker accelerates his feet in short, choppy steps and mirrors
the corner. Your flanker should not leave his feet unless the corner
commits to one side. If the corner stays face up, he should just
stick with him and let the back cut off his block. Teach your fla nker
to attack the corner if he gets a "go go" call from the ball carrier.
[n teaching the stalk, we start with receivers going against a
defender with a hand dummy. We progress from three-quarters
speed to full speed. This is where your receivers get their repeti-
tions. The option drill simulates game conditions for the receivers.